(For Customer) IManager NetEco 6000 Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (V600R007C90 - 06) (PDF) - EN
September 10, 2022 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
Short Description
Download (For Customer) IManager NetEco 6000 Device Installation and Commissioning Guide (V600R007C90 - 06) (PDF) - EN...
Description
iManager NetEco 6000 V600R007C90
Device Installation and Commissioning Guide
Issue
06 06
Date
2018-07-13 2018-07-13
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2018. All rights reserved. reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Huawei Te Technologies chnologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document document are the property property of their respectiv respective e holders.
Notice Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations recommendations in this document are prov provided ided "AS IS" without warrantie warranties, s, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations recommendat ions in this docu document ment do not constitute a w arranty of any kind, express express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://e.huawei.com
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commi Commissioning ssioning Guide
About Thi Thiss Document
About This Document Purpose This document describes the iManager NetEco V600R007C V 600R007C90 90 in terms of its hardware hardwa re installation, cable connection, commissioning, and maintenance to help readers better understand the NetEco products. The figures provided in this document are for reference refere nce only only.. For details about NetEco product software commissioning, see iManager NetEco 6000 V600R007C90 Product Documentation. Documentation . The corresponding software version is NetEco V600R007C90SPC350.
Intended Audience This document is intended for:
Sales engineers
Technical support personnel
System engineers
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous haza rdous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous haza rdous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data da ta loss, performance deteriorati dete rioration, on, or unanticipated re result sults. s. NOTICE is used to address practices not related r elated to personal
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commi Commissioning ssioning Guide
Symbol
About Thi Thiss Document
Description injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
Change History History Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
Issue 06 (2018-0 (2018-07-13) 7-13)
Modified the alarm names on the alarm renaming page for the ECC500 V6 access package of MED_Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_SNMP_V1.2.
Added the description about performance counter renaming.
Added the description about connecting cables to the double door interlock.
Issue 05 (2018-0 (2018-04-19) 4-19) Modified the description about server ports.
Issue 04 (2017-1 (2017-12-11) 2-11) Optimized section Connecting the Access Management System Cable.
Issue 03 (2017-0 (2017-08-07) 8-07) Modified the manual based on the GUI changes.
Issue 02 (2017-0 (2017-04-12) 4-12) Optimized Creating an ECC800 Collector on the NetEco.
Issue 01 (2017-0 (2017-03-03) 3-03) Optimized cable connection scenarios into four: server, LAN switch, ECC500 collector, and ECC800 collector. This issue is the first official release.
Issue Draft B (2017-02-13) Added collectors CIM01C1 and CIM01C2. Optimized the cable connection and settings for the air conditioner and UPS.
Issue Draft A (2016-12-15) This issue is used for first office application (FOA).
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
Contents Aboutt This Docu Abou Document ment ................................ ....................................................... ............................................. ............................................ ............................... ......... ii 1 Safety Precautio Precautions ns ........................ ............................................... ............................................. .............................................. ............................................ .................... 1 1.1 General Safety Precautions .................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 Electrical Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 Battery Safety ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.4 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................................. 6 1.5 Others..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 Ins Installat tallation ion Prepar Preparation ations........................... s................................................. ............................................ .............................................. ................................ ........ 8 2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 8 2.2 Personnel Requirements ....................................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3 Too Tools ls and Instruments Instru ments .............................................................. ................................ ............................................................ ............................................................. ............................................................ ................................ ...9
3 Ins Installin talling g Devic Devices es ...................... ............................................ ............................................ .............................................. .............................................. ...................... 12 3.1 Installing a Camera ............................................................................................................................................................. 12 3.2 Installing a Smoke Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 15 3.3 Installing a WS302M2A-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor ....................................................................... 16 3.4 Installing a WS332M-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor............................................................................. 17 3.5 Installing an Infrared Sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 18 3.6 Installing a WLDS900 Water Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 20 3.7 Installing the WCON-22Z Skylight Ceiling Controller ................................................................................................... 23 3.8 Installing the WCON-14Z Skylight Ceiling Controller ................................................................................................... 23 3.9 Installing the Lighting Control Box................................................................................................................................... 24
4 Conn Connecti ecting ng Moni Monitoring toring Cable Cabless to Devices ....................... ............................................. ............................................ .......................... .... 25 4.1 Scenarios for Connecting the server .................................................................................................................................. 25 4.1.1 Server Port Description ................................................................................................................................................... 25 4.1.2 Installing the SMS Modem ............................................................................................................................................. 27 4.2 Scenarios for Connecting the LAN Switch ....................................................................................................................... 29 4.2.1 Switch Port ....................................................................................................................................................................... 29 4.2.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Camera ................................................................................................................ 29 4.2.3 Connecting Con necting a Monitoring Cable for the th e A8802T o orr A8804T Door Access Controller ....... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... .......... ...30 4.2.4 (Optional) Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an NVR6128G2 ................................................................................... 33 4.2.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a VCN500 .............................................................................................................. 34
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
4.2.6 Connecting the Air Conditioner Monitoring Cable ....................................................................................................... 35 4.2.6.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an ACRD502 Air Conditioner ........................................................................... 35 4.2.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PEX Air Conditioner ....................................................................................... 36 4.2.6.3 Connecting Conn ecting the NetCol5000(A042/A035/A020/C030) NetCol5000(A042/A035/A020/C030) and NetCol8000(C070/C150) NetCol8000(C070/C150) Air Cond Conditioner itioner Monitoring Cable .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 37 4.2.7 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable .......................................................................................................................... 41 4.2.7.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a HIPULSE-NXL UPS ....................................................................................... 41 4.2.7.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Galaxy7000 UPS ............................................................................................. 41 4.2.7.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Riello UPS ....................................................................................................... 42 4.2.7.4 Connecting the UPS2000-G Monitoring Cable (SNMP) ........................................................................................... 42 4.2.7.5 Connecting the UPS5000G-A Monitoring Cable ....................................................................................................... 43 4.2.7.6 Connecting the UPS5000-E or UPS5000-S Monitoring Cable ................................................................................. 45 4.2.8 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable ................................................................................................................. 45 4.2.9 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to TP483000D ............................................................................................................ 45 4.2.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an RH2288 IPMI ................................................................................................. 46 4.2.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a CIM01C2........................................................................................................... 46 4.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC500 Collector ............................................................................................................. 46 4.3.1 Preparing a Monitoring Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 46 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector ............................................................................................................................... 48
4.3.3 Port Description for ECC500 Collector ......................................................................................................................... 56 4.3.3.1 RS485 Communication Card ....................................................................................................................................... 56 4.3.3.2 AI/DI Expansion Card .................................................................................................................................................. 59 4.3.3.3 GPRS Expansion Card ................................................................................................................................................. 60 4.3.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the NetEco .............................................................................................................. 64 4.3.5 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to a Independent Deployment AI/DI Unit .................... ........................... ............... ............... ............... ............... .............. .......67 4.3.6 Connecting Sensors Cable............................................................................................................................................... 68 4.3.6.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Door Status Sensor ....................................................................................... 68 4.3.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable for the SD-09A-HWA Current-Type Smoke Sensor ............................................ 69 4.3.6.3 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to the SDLH-94R Dry Contact-T Contact-Type ype Smoke Sensor........ ............... .............. ............... ............... .............. .......70 4.3.6.4 Connecting Con necting a Monitoring Cable Cab le to a WS302M2A-5 WS302M2A-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidi Humidity ty Sensor ........ ............... .............. ......... ..71 4.3.6.5 Connecting Con necting a Monitoring Cable Cab le to a WS332M-5 WS332M-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor ... .......... .............. ............... ............ ....72 4.3.6.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an NTC Sensor.................................................................................................... 74 4.3.6.7 Connecting Cables to the WLDS900 Water Sensor ................................................................................................... 75 4.3.6.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WLDS600 Water Sensor ................................................................................. 76 4.3.6.9 Connecting Cables to the SJ535A Water Sensor ........................................................................................................ 76 4.3.6.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Point Water Sensor ........................................................................................ 78 4.3.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Hydrogen Sensor ................................................................................................ 79 4.3.8 Connecting the Access Management System Cable ...................................................................................................... 80 4.3.8.1 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to the A8802RS or A8804RS Access Controller Co ntroller ......... ................ .............. ............... ................ ............... ........... ....80 4.3.8.2 Connecting Con necting a Monitoring Cable Cab le to the Shengjiu_MS899 Electronic Door Lock.................... Lock............................ ............... ............... ............... .......... ...89 4.3.9 Connecting Co nnecting Monitoring Cables C ables to a WCON-22Z Skylight Ceiling Controller ........... ................... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... .......... ...90 4.3.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WCON-14Z Skylight Controller ..................................................................... 91 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
4.3.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Lighting Control Box ....................................................................................... 95 4.3.12 Connecting the Air Conditioner Monitoring Cable ..................................................................................................... 95 4.3.12.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PEX Air Conditioner ..................................................................................... 95 4.3.12.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a CRV Air Conditioner ..................................................................................... 97 4.3.12.3 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to a DataMate3000 Air Conditioner (Method One) ........... ................... ............... ............... ............... ......... ..98 4.3.12.4 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to a DataMate3000 Air Conditioner (Method Two) ......... ................ ............... ............... ............... ..........100 ..100 4.3.12.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable Cab le to an AP0481 AP0481H H Air Conditioner ........ ............... .............. ............... ................ ............... .............. ............... ............... ............101 .....101
4.3.12.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an XR066C Air Conditioner ..........................................................................102 4.3.12.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a NetCol5000-C025 .......................................................................................102 4.3.12.8 Connecting the NetCol5000-A042/A035/A020/C030 NetCol5000-A042/A035/A020/C030 Monitoring Cable ....... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ........103 .103 4.3.12.9 Connecting the NetCol8000-A050/A100/C070/C150 NetCol8000-A050/A100/C070/C150 Monitoring Cable ....... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ........108 .108 4.3.12.10 Connecting the NetCol8000-A030U/A040D/A060 NetCol8000-A030U/A040D/A060D/C030U/C150U D/C030U/C150U Mon Monitoring itoring Cable .......... ................. ............... ............... ......... 112 112 4.3.13 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable...................................................................................................................... 113 4.3.13.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a HIPULSE U UPS ........................................................................................ 113 4.3.13.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Delta 120 kVA UPS ..................................................................................... 113 4.3.13.3 Connecting the UPS2000-G Monitoring Cable (MODBUS) ................................................................................ 114 4.3.14 Connecting the Electricity Meter Monitoring Cable ................................................................................................. 115 4.3.14.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a YD2010 Coulometer ................................................................................... 115 4.3.14.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PD800 Coulometer ...................................................................................... 116 4.3.14.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PD510 Coulometer ...................................................................................... 118 4.3.14.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a DIRISA20 Coulometer ............................................................................... 118 4.3.14.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cab le to a PM710 and PM750 Co Coulometer ulometer ........... .................. .............. ............... ................ ............... .............. ............... .......... ..119 4.3.14.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an ABB Coulometer .......................................................................................120 4.3.14.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cab le to a PZ80L-E4KC Coulometer ....... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ...............1 .......121 21 4.3.14.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable Cab le to a KeluMeter Coulometer ....... ............... ............... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ............122 .....122 4.3.14.9 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to a PMAC625 and PMAC720 PMAC720 Coulometer .......... ................. ............... ................ ............... .............. .............1 ......123 23 4.3.14.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PD194Z Coulometer .................................................................................124 4.3.14.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a SepamT20 Coulometer..............................................................................125 4.3.14.12 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the IG-NT Coulometer .................................................................................126 4.3.14.13 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PM5350 Coulometer .................................................................................127 4.3.15 Connecting the PDC Monitoring Cable .....................................................................................................................128 4.3.15.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an ABB OTM ATS .........................................................................................128 4.3.15.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a TU520A ATS................................................................................................129 4.3.15.3 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable .........................................................................................................131 4.3.15.4 Connecting Co nnecting a Monitoring Cable to the Monitoring Type-PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4 Type-PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1 -M1 ..................... ............................ ............... ..........131 ..131 4.3.15.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cab le to an HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1............ M1................... .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............132 .....132 4.3.16 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Battery Monitoring Unit.................................................................................133 4.3.17 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehumidifier .....................................................................134 4.3.18 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the DG ................................................................................................................134 4.3.19 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Sepam Series 10 VCB ....................................................................................135 4.3.20 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an AVR ...............................................................................................................136 4.3.21 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a CIM01C1 ........................................................................................................136 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
4.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800 Collector ...........................................................................................................137 4.4.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the ECC800 Collector .........................................................................................137
5 Checking Checking the Insta Installation llation ........................................................... ................................... .............................................. ...................................... ................ 138 5.1 Checking the Installation of the Cabinet .........................................................................................................................138 5.2 Checking the Installation of Components in the Cabinet ...............................................................................................139 5.3 Checking the Installation of Power Cables and Ground Cables ....................................................................................139 5.4 Checking the Connection of Signal Cables .....................................................................................................................140
6 Adding Adding Devi Devices ces ..................... ........................................... ............................................ .............................................. ............................................... ......................... 141 6.1 Basic Operations Before Adding Devices .......................................................................................................................142 6.1.1 Creating a Domain .........................................................................................................................................................142 6.1.2 Adding a Module ...........................................................................................................................................................146 6.2 Setting SMS ......................................................................................................................................................................150 6.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC500 Collector and LAN Switch ..............................................................................151 6.3.1 Commissioning a CCU Collector .................................................................................................................................151 6.3.1.1 Configuring CCU Collector Scenarios......................................................................................................................151 6.3.1.2 Configuring a CCU Collector ....................................................................................................................................154 6.3.1.3 Checking CCU Collector Software Version..............................................................................................................158 6.3.1.4 Configuring the Level Alarm Alarm Mode Mod e for the EEUA Daughter Control Con trol Card o off the CCU Collector ... .......... .............. ............159 .....159 6.3.1.5 Configuring Dry Contact Alarm for Main Control Card of CCU Collector ...........................................................161 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector ...................................................................................................163 6.3.1.7 Creating a CCU Collector on the NetEco .................................................................................................................165 6.3.2 Commissioning the ECC500 V6 Collector ..................................................................................................................167 6.3.2.1 Setting ECC500 V6 Collector IP Address.................................................................................................................167 6.3.2.2 Setting Pass-through Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector .............................................................................169 6.3.2.3 Setting SNMP Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector ........................................................................................170 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector........................................................................................173 6.3.2.5 Creating an ECC500 V6 Collector on the NetEco ...................................................................................................175 6.3.3 Adding CIM01C1 Collector(ECC500).........................................................................................................................178
6.3.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a CIM01C1 Collector .......................................................................................178 6.3.3.2 Creating a CIM01C1 Collector on the NetEco .........................................................................................................179
6.3.3.3 CIM and BIM Networking.........................................................................................................................................181 6.3.4 Adding CIM01C2 Collector(LAN Switch) ..................................................................................................................183 6.3.4.1 Setting Parameters on the CIM WebUI .....................................................................................................................183 6.3.4.2 Creating a CIM01C2 Collector on the NetEco .........................................................................................................187 6.3.4.3 CIM and BIM Networking.........................................................................................................................................191 6.3.5 Adding RH2288_IPMI ..................................................................................................................................................193 6.3.5.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the RH2288_IPMI Server ................................................................................193 6.3.5.2 Creating a RH2288_IPMI Server on the NetEco .....................................................................................................193 6.3.6 Adding IBM ...................................................................................................................................................................195 6.3.6.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the IBM Server .................................................................................................195 6.3.6.2 Creating an IBM Server on the NetEco ....................................................................................................................195 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
6.3.7 Adding Dry Contact Interface Devices ........................................................................................................................197 6.3.7.1 Setting ECC500 V600R001C00 Dry Contact Interface Parameters .......................................................................197 6.3.7.1.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters ..............................................................................................197 6.3.7.1.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters.............................................................................198 6.3.7.1.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact .....................................................................200 6.3.7.2 Setting Dry Contact Interface Parameters for ECC500 V600R001C01 or Later Versions....................................202 6.3.7.2.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters on the ECC .........................................................................202 6.3.7.2.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters on the ECC ........................................................203 6.3.7.2.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact on th thee ECC............ ECC................... ............... ................ ............... ..............2 .......205 05 6.3.7.3 Commissioning the Sensors on the NetEco ..............................................................................................................207 6.3.7.3.1 Creating an Icon for a Door Status Sensor.............................................................................................................207 6.3.7.3.2 Create the Water Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................212 6.3.7.3.3 Create the Smoke Sensor ........................................................................................................................................215 6.3.7.3.4 Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco ..................................................................................218 6.3.7.3.5 Modifying Performance Counters C ounters for Dry Contacts on the NetEco ...... .............. ............... .............. ............... ................ ............... .............. ............... ..........222 ..222 6.3.7.4 Commissioning the Skylight Ceiling Controller ......................................................................................................223 6.3.8 Adding a Fire Controller ...............................................................................................................................................228 6.3.8.1 Creating a Fire Controller on the NetEco .................................................................................................................228 6.3.9 Adding Temperature Sensors ........................................................................................................................................230 6.3.9.1 Setting Temperature Sensor Monitoring Parameters ................................................................................................230 6.3.9.2 Setting Device IP Addresses of Temperature Sensors ..............................................................................................232 6.3.9.3 Creating an NTC Sensor on the NetEco ...................................................................................................................233 6.3.10 Adding an Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor ...........................................................................................235 6.3.10.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an Ambient Temperature and Humidity Senso Sensorr ...... ............. ............... ............... ............... ...............2 .......235 35 6.3.10.2 Creating a Temperature and Humidity Sensor on the NetEco ...............................................................................236 6.3.11 Adding a Water Leakage Sensor .................................................................................................................................238 6.3.11.1 Creating a Water Leakage Sensor on the NetEco ...................................................................................................238 6.3.12 Adding a Hydrogen Sensor .........................................................................................................................................240 6.3.12.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Hydrogen Sensor .........................................................................................240 6.3.12.2 Creating a Hydrogen Sensor on the NetEco ...........................................................................................................241 6.3.13 Adding the Access Management System ...................................................................................................................243 6.3.13.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the th e A8802T or A8804T Access Controller ....... .............. .............. ............... ................ ............... ..............2 .......243 43 6.3.13.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the th e A8802RS or A8804RS Access Controller .......... .................. ............... ............... ............... .............2 ......245 45 6.3.13.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller ......................................245 6.3.13.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Shengjiu_MS899 Electr E lectronic onic Door Lock ....... ............... ............... .............. ............... ................ ...........246 ...246 6.3.13.5 Creating an A8802RS/A8804RS Access Controller on the NetEco......................................................................246 6.3.13.6 Creating an A8802T/A8804T Access Controller on the NetEco ...........................................................................248 6.3.13.7 Creating a NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller on the NetEco ...........................................................250 6.3.13.8 Creating an Electronic Door Lock on the NetEco ..................................................................................................252 6.3.13.9 Formatting an Access Controller .............................................................................................................................254 6.3.14 Adding an Air Conditioner ..........................................................................................................................................255 6.3.14.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an ACRD502 Air Conditioner .......................................................................255 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
6.3.14.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PEX Air Conditioner (over SNMP) ...........................................................255 6.3.14.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PEX Air Conditioner Co nditioner (over Modbus) ......... ................ ............... ............... ............... ............... .............. ...........256 ....256 6.3.14.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a CRV Air Conditioner...................................................................................256 6.3.14.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a DataMate3000 Air Conditioner ..................................................................257 6.3.14.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an AP0481H Air Conditioner ........................................................................258 6.3.14.7 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an XR066C Air Conditioner ..........................................................................259 6.3.14.8 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Air Conditioner (MODBUS-TCP) ..........................................................259 6.3.14.9 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Air Conditioner (MODBUS-RTU) .........................................................261 6.3.14.10 Creating a Air Conditioner on the NetEco ............................................................................................................262 6.3.15 Adding a UPS...............................................................................................................................................................267 6.3.15.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a HIPULSE U UPS ........................................................................................267 6.3.15.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Galaxy7000 UPS .........................................................................................268 6.3.15.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Delta 120 kVA UPS .....................................................................................268 6.3.15.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Riello UPS ...................................................................................................269 6.3.15.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-G (over SNMP) ..........................................................................269 6.3.15.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000 (over Modbus) ............................................................................272 6.3.15.7 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over SNMP) .......................................................................................273 6.3.15.8 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over Modbus TCP) ............................................................................276 6.3.15.9 Creating a UPS on the NetEco.................................................................................................................................278 6.3.16 Adding a PDU ..............................................................................................................................................................282 6.3.16.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000 (over Modbus)............................................................................282 6.3.16.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000 (over SNMP) ..............................................................................283 6.3.16.3 Setting AVR Monitoring Parameters .......................................................................................................................284 6.3.16.4 Creating a PDU on the NetEco ................................................................................................................................285 6.3.17 Adding a Coulometer...................................................................................................................................................288 6.3.17.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a YD2010 Coulometer ...................................................................................288 6.3.17.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD800 Coulometer ......................................................................................289 6.3.17.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD510 Coulometer ......................................................................................290 6.3.17.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a DIRISA20 Coulometer ...............................................................................292 6.3.17.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PM 710 Coulometer ....................................................................................293 6.3.17.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a ABB Coulometer .........................................................................................293 6.3.17.7 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PZ80L-E4KC Coulometer ..........................................................................294 6.3.17.8 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a KeluMeter Coulometer ...............................................................................295 6.3.17.9 Setting Monitoring Parameters Parameters for PMAC625 and PMAC720 Cou Coulometer lometer ..... ............. ............... .............. ............... ................ ............... .............2 ......295 95 6.3.17.10 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD194Z Coulometer .................................................................................296 6.3.17.11 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a SepamT20 Coulometer .............................................................................296 6.3.17.12 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a IG-NT Coulometer ....................................................................................297 6.3.17.13 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PM5350 Coulometer .................................................................................297 6.3.17.14 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a HUAWEI Coulometer ...............................................................................298 6.3.17.15 Creating a Coulometer on the NetEco ..................................................................................................................299 6.3.18 Adding an Relay ..........................................................................................................................................................303 6.3.18.1 Setting Parameters for a Sepam Series 10 VCB .....................................................................................................303 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
6.3.18.2 Creating a Relay on the NetEco ..............................................................................................................................304 6.3.19 Adding a Transformer..................................................................................................................................................305 6.3.19.1 Creating a Transformer on the NetEco....................................................................................................................305 6.3.20 Adding an ATS .............................................................................................................................................................307 6.3.20.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an ABB OTM ATS .........................................................................................307 6.3.20.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a TU520A ATS ...............................................................................................308 6.3.20.3 Creating a ATS on the NetEco .................................................................................................................................309
6.3.21 Adding a Power Module.............................................................................................................................................. 311 6.3.21.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for TP483000D ..................................................................................................... 311 6.3.21.2 Creating a Power Module on the NetEco................................................................................................................ 311 6.3.22 Adding a RPDU ...........................................................................................................................................................315 6.3.22.1 Setting RPDU_HUAWEI_PDU2000-32-1PH-20-4-M2 Monitoring Parameters ................................................315 6.3.22.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1 .................................................................315 6.3.22.3 Creating a RPDU on the NetEco .............................................................................................................................316 6.3.23 Adding a Battery Monitoring Unit..............................................................................................................................319 6.3.23.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Battery Monitoring Unit .............................................................................319 6.3.23.2 Creating a Battery Monitoring Unit on the NetEco ...............................................................................................320 6.3.24 Adding a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehumidifier ..................................................................................................................322 6.3.24.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehumidifier..................................................................322 6.3.24.2 Creating a Dehumidifier on the NetEco ..................................................................................................................322 6.3.25 Adding a Humidifier ....................................................................................................................................................324 6.3.25.1 Creating a Humidifier on the NetEcoNetEco .........................................................................................................324 6.3.26 Adding a DG ................................................................................................................................................................326 6.3.26.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a P1000P1 DG ................................................................................................326 6.3.26.2 Creating a DG on the NetEco ..................................................................................................................................326 6.3.27 Adding a NVR6128G2 and eSpace IPC Camera.......................................................................................................329 6.3.27.1 Configuring Server Parameters ...............................................................................................................................329 6.3.27.1.1 Logging In to the NVR Management System .....................................................................................................329 6.3.27.1.2 Configuring IP Addresses of Management Servers ............................................................................................330 6.3.27.1.3 Enabling or Disabling Services ............................................................................................................................331 6.3.27.1.4 Changing the Password and System Time ...........................................................................................................333 6.3.27.2 Installing the eSpace IVS Client..............................................................................................................................334 6.3.27.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the eSpace IPC Semi-Dome ..........................................................................335 6.3.27.4 Changing the Preset Password for the eSpace IPC Semi-Dome ...........................................................................336 6.3.27.5 Adding Cameras on NVR6128G2 ...........................................................................................................................337 6.3.27.5.1 Adding Clairvoyance-Compliant Cameras ..........................................................................................................337 6.3.27.5.2 Checking Basic Camera Functions ......................................................................................................................341 6.3.27.6 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco.....................................................................................................342 6.3.27.7 Creating an eSpace IPC Camera on the NetEco .....................................................................................................345 6.3.28 Adding the Video Management System .....................................................................................................................346 6.3.28.1 Configuring VCN500 Server Parameters ...............................................................................................................346 6.3.28.1.1 Changing IP Addresses of VCN500 Servers .......................................................................................................346 Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Contents
6.3.28.1.2 Changing the Preset Password for the VCN500 Servers ....................................................................................348 6.3.28.2 Installing and Starting the IVS Client .....................................................................................................................349 6.3.28.3 Commissioning IPC6321 Cameras .........................................................................................................................351 6.3.28.4 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras .........................................................................................................................352 6.3.28.5 Changing the Preset Password for the IPC6321 Camera .......................................................................................354 6.3.28.6 Changing the Preset Password for the IPC6325 Camera .......................................................................................355 6.3.28.7 Adding a Camera to the VCN500 ............................................................................................................................356
6.3.28.8 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco.....................................................................................................359 6.3.28.9 Adding a Camera Using Automatic Discovery.......................................................................................................361 6.3.28.10 Registering with the OCX Plug-in ........................................................................................................................363 6.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800 Collector ...........................................................................................................367 6.4.1 Commissioning Southbound Devices of ECC800.......................................................................................................367 6.4.2 Setting and Adding the ECC800 Collector ..................................................................................................................367 6.4.2.1 Setting NetEco Parameters.........................................................................................................................................367 6.4.2.2 Creating an ECC800 Collector on the NetEco .........................................................................................................368 6.4.2.3 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function for the ECC800 ............................................................................370
7 FAQ ..................................................................................................................................... 373 7.1 How Do I Query the VCN500 Version Information? .....................................................................................................373 7.2 How Do I Resolve the Connection Issue Between Between the NVR6128 NVR6128 an and d NetEco? ...... ............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ...............3 .......374 74 7.3 How Do I Handle Abnormal Door Control Status? ........................................................................................................375 7.4 How Do I Set Parameters for Logging In to the UPS2000 WebUI? .............................................................................376 7.5 What Can I Do If the ECC500 Collector Cannot Be Logged In on the WebUI? .........................................................377 7.6 How to log In to the ECC800 WebUI ..............................................................................................................................378 7.7 How to Change the Preset Password for the ECC500 Collector ...................................................................................381 7.8 How to Change the Preset Password for the CCU Collector .........................................................................................384 7.9 How to Update the Software Version of CCU Collector................................................................................................384
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
1
Safety Precautions
This chapter describes the precauti preca utions ons for installing, operating, and maintaining Smart Module equipment.
1.1 General Safety Precautions This section describes safety precautions for installing, operating, and maintaining a smart module.
Declaration Huawei will not be liable for any consequences consequence s of the foll following owing scenarios:
Running in conditions conditions not specified specif ied in this manual.
Installation or use in environments en vironments which are not spec specifi ified ed in related international standards.
Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code.
Operations not complying with the operation instructions and safety precautions in this document.
Device damage due to abnormal natural factors.
Overview To ensure safety of humans and the equipment, pay attention to the safety symbols on the equipment and all the safety instructions in this document. The "NOTICE", "WARNING", "CAUTION", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not represent all the safety instructions. They are only ssupplements upplements to the safety instructions.
Local Safety Regulations When operating the equipment, you must follow local laws and regulations. The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to the local laws and regulations.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Personal Requirements Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain Huawei equipment, and they must understand basic safety precautions to avoid hazards.
Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain the equipment.
Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect the equipment.
Only personnel certified or authorized by Huawei are allowed to replace or change the equipment or components (including software).
Installation personnel must report faults or errors that migh mightt cause ser serious ious safety issues to related owners.
Grounding Requirements Equipment to be grounded must meet the following requirements:
When installing the equipment, always ground the device first. Disconnect the ground cable at the end of removing the device.
Do not damage the ground conductor conductor..
Do not operate the device device in the absence of a properly pr operly installed ground conductor.
Conduct the electrical inspection inspect ion carefully. carefully. The device (or system) must be connected permanently to the protection ground before an operation. Before operating the device, check the electrical connection of the device to ensure that it is securely grounded.
Human Safety
Before operating a device, wear electrostatic discharge (ESD) clothes, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. Do not wear jewelry or watches when you operate the device.
In the case of fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment room, and turn on the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter a building that is on fire.
Wear a helmet and safety belt when working at heights. Ensure that the safety belt is properly connected when working at heights over 2000 mm above the ground. Set the warning zone and place warning signs under the working spot.
Equipment Safety
The device must be fixed securely on the floor or to other immovable objects such as walls and mounting racks before operation.
Do not block the ventilation vents while while the system is operating.
Tighten the thumbscrews by using a tool after initial installation and subsequent access to the panel.
After the installation, remove packing materials from the equipment area.
1.2 Electrical Safety This section describes the precautions to be taken in terms of electrical safety.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
High Voltage
Devices are powered by high-voltage power source. Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with the power source may result in seri serious ous injury injury.. Non-standard and improper operatio opera tions ns under high voltage may result in fire and electr electric ic shocks.
High Electrical Leakage
Ground the device before powering it on. Otherwise, personal injury or device damage may be caused by high leakage current. If a "high electrical leakage" tag is present on the power terminal of the device, you must ground the device before powering it on.
Power Cable
Do not install or remove power cables when the device is on. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause fire or hurt human eyes.
Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch.
Before connecting a power cable, verify that the label on the power cable is correct.
Electrostatic Discharge
The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI) circuits.
Human body movement, friction between human bodies and clothes, friction between shoes and floors, or handling of plastic articles causes static electromagnetic fields on human bodies. These static electromagnetic electroma gnetic fields cannot be eliminated until the static is discharged.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
To prevent electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static on human bodies, you must wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching the device or handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
Figure 1-1 Putting on an ESD wrist strap
Neutral-Ground Voltage It is recommended that the three-phase loads be equalized and the neutral-ground voltage be kept at less than 2 V to meet power distribution requirements.
1.3 Battery Safety This section describes the safety precauti preca utions ons for operating batteries.
Before operating batteries, read the safety precautions for battery handling and battery connection methods carefully ca refully..
Any incorrect operation opera tion of batteries may cause danger. danger. When operating batteries, avoid short circuits and electrolyte overflow or leakage.
Electrolyte overflows may damage the device. It will corrode metal parts and circuit boards, and ultimately damage the device and cause short circuits of circuit boards.
Batteries have a high h igh power capacity. capacity. Short c ircuits caused by incorrect operations ope rations of batteries can result in serious personal injury.
Preventive Measures When installing and maintaining batteries, pay attention to the following:
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Use special insulated tools.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Wear protec protectiv tivee goggles goggles and take other necessary protective measures.
Wear rubber gloves and a protective coat to guard against electrolyte overflow.
When handling a battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Placing the battery upside down or tilting the battery is prohibited.
Switch off the power supply during installation and maintenance.
Battery Short Circuit
Battery short circuits may cause personal injury. The high transient current generated by a short circuit may release a surge of power and cause fire. To avoid battery short circuits, do not replace batteries online.
Harmful Gas
Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries. Place and secure lead-acid batteries horizontally to prevent inflammation or devi de vice ce corrosion cor rosion due due to flammable gas emitted from batteries. Lead-acid batteries emit flammable gas when used. Therefore, store these batteries in well-ventilated areas, and take fire-prevention measures.
Battery Temperature
High temperatures may result in battery distortion, damage, and electrolyte overflow. When the battery temperature is higher than 60°C, check the battery for electrolyte overflow. If the electrolyte overflows, handle the leakage immediately immediate ly..
Electrolyte Leakage
When the electrolyte leaks, absorb and neutralize the electrolyte immediately.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
When moving or handling a battery whose electrolyte leaks, note that the leaked electrolyte may hurt human bodies. If the electrolyte leaks, immediately use the following substances to neutralize and absorb the leaked electrolyte:
NaHCO3
Na2CO3
When using substances to neutralize neutra lize and absorb electrolytes, strictly follow the guidelines provided by the battery manufacturer. If your body comes in contact with the leaked electrolyte, wash with clean water immediately and seek medical advice if the situation is serious.
1.4 Mechanical Safety This section describes the precautions be taken when moving sharp and heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
Do not drill holes on the rack without permission. Non-standard drilling may deteriorate electromagnetic shielding performance and damage the internal cables, and metal scraps generated during drilling may short-circuit a circuit board.
Before drilling holes on the rack, first remove the cables inside the rack.
To protect your eyes from metal shavings, wear wea r a pair of goggles goggles when drilling holes.
Before drilling holes, wear protective gloves.
When drilling holes, prevent metal meta l shards from dropping into the cabinet. After drilling, clean up metal shards immediately immediately..
Moving Sharp Objects
Wear protectiv protectivee gloves gloves when moving sharp objects.
Fan
When replacing a component, place the component, screws, and tools in a safe place. plac e. Otherwise, if any of them fall into the operating fans, the fans may be damaged.
When replacing a component near nea r fans, do not insert your fingers or boards into the operating fans until the fans are switched off and stop running.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Moving Heavy Objects
Be careful to prev pre vent injury when moving heavy objects.
To prevent prevent injury, injury, when moving the chassis outwards, be aware a ware of unfixed or hea heav vy objects on the chassis.
At least two persons are required to move the chassis. When lifting it, keep your back straight and move smoothly to avoid a void injury. injury.
Move or lift the chassis c hassis by holding its lower edge. Do not hold the handles on certain modules such as power suppl supply y, fans, and a nd boards because they cannot support the weight of the device.
1.5 Others This section describes the precautions to be taken when binding sign signal al ca cables bles and laying out power cables at a low temperature. temperature .
Binding Signal Cables
Signal cables must be bound separately from strong-current cables and high-voltage cables.
Routing Power Cables When the temperature tempera ture is low, low, vi violent olent strike str ike or vibration may damage the cable c able sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following requirements:
Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than 0°C.
Before laying out power cables which have been stored in a temperature lower than 0°C, move the power cables to an environment of the ambient temperature and store them at the ambient temperature for at least 24 hours.
Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly from the vehicle.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2
2 Installation Preparations
Installation Preparations
2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance Context Unpack and inspect all cabinets, mechanical parts, and components. Check that all the items are intact and comply with the packing list on the presence of both the project supervisor and customer.
Procedure Step 1 Unpack the carton car ton labeled labeled Contain Packing List and take out the Packing the Packing List . Step 2 Check all items against a gainst the Packing the Packing List . Step 3 If shortage or miscarriage occurs, fill in the Cargo Shortage and Miscarriage Report . Form. Step 4 If cargo damage occurs, fill in the Cargo Replacement Application Form.
Step 5 Sign on the Packing the Packing List with with the customer after verifying that all required items are delivered.
Step 6 Store the items properly. ----End
Follow-up Procedure Put the items to be installed immediately onto an ESD surface, such as a polyethylene (PE) bag or an expandable polyethylene (EPE) foam. Pack the iitems tems not to be installed immediately with their original packing materials. Put them in a dry and cool environment without exposure to sunlight or electromagnetic radiation.
2.2 Personnel Requirements Only trained and qualified personnel who fully understand basic safety precautions are allowed to install and operate a smart smar t modul modular ar data center.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2 Installation Preparations
Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused ca used by the vi violation olation of this document. The requirements are as follows:
Customers' installation personnel must trained by Huawei and understand how to install and operate a smart modular databe center.
The number of installation personnel varies depending on the project progress and the installation environment. Typically, Typically, three to fiv fivee persons per sons are required.
2.3 Tools and Instruments This section lists the tools and instruments required for installation. Table 2-1 General tools
Name, Specifications, and Appearance Protective gloves
Marker
Measuring tape (5 m)
Level
Step ladder (2 m)
Phillips screwdriver (M4, M6, and M8)
Phillips screwdriver M4 (length < 100 mm)
Flat-head screwdriver (2 – 5 mm)
Adjustable wrench (6")
Socket wrench M4/M6/M8/M12
Hex key
Box-end wrench (M6, M8, and M12)
Torque wrench (28 mm)
Solid wrench (12#/13#/18#)
Cotton cloth
Labels
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2 Installation Preparations
Name, Specifications, and Appearance
Electric screwdriver
Hand drill (Φ3, Φ3.7, Φ4, Φ4.5, Φ5, Φ6, Φ10, and Φ12 drill bits)
Hammer drill (Φ16 drill bit)
Heat gun
Laser locator
Utility knife
Electrician's knife
Impact tool
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation tape
Needle-nose pliers
Diagonal pliers
RJ45 crimping tool
Crimping tool
Wire stripper
Hydraulic pliers
Wire clippers
Cable ties
Multimeter
Electroprobe
Brush
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2 Installation Preparations
Name, Specifications, and Appearance Claw hammer
Vacuum cleaner
Hacksaw
Handsaw
Right angle
Heat shrink tubing
Network cable tester
Rubber mallet
Adjustable socket screwdriver
Flashlight
Clamp meter
Phase sequence meter
NOTE This table may not list some tools required at specific sites. Onsite installation personnel and technical support personnel should prepare tools based on site requirements.
Table 2-2 Transportation and unpacking tools
Tool Appearance, Specifications, and Name Pallet truck
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Diesel forklift
Lifting rope (bearing capacity ≥ 400 kg) kg)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
Lever (bearing capacity ≥ 400 kg) kg)
11
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
3
Installing Devices
3.1 Installing a Camera Prerequisites
A camera and tools for for insta installing lling it have have been prepared. pr epared.
A network cable for connecting the the came camera ra to the switch has been prepared.
The switch has been normally powered on.
This topic describes how to install and commission a camera in a room. Two persons are required for the commissioning.
Cameras used in different scenarios may be installed in different carriers. ca rriers. The camera came ra in a corridor is installed installed on the ccontrol ontrol skylight and the one in a room is installed on the ceiling or a wall. This topic describes how to install a camera on the ceiling. For installing cameras in other scenarios, perform the same steps.
The camera ca mera described in this section can be installed installed only on a suspended ceili ce iling ng if on-ceiling installation is required.
Context
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the camera. Step 2 Use bolts to secure the base to the ceiling, counterclockwise tighten the dome camera to the base, and use screws to secure it, as shown in in Figure 3-1. 3-1.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Figure 3-1 Installing a camera
If it is on a concrete wall, use plastic expansion tubes and tapping screws to secure the camera.
If it is on a control skylight, use M3x10 screws to secure the base to the control skylight.
Prior to installing the camera, properly install related cables to avoid removing it from time to time.
Step 3 Use the hexagon screwdriver configured with the camera to remove the explosion-proof screws, and take down the dome cover, as shown in in Figure 3-2. 3-2. Removing ng a dome do me cover Figure 3-2 Removi
Step 4 Adjust the angle, distance, and resolution for the camera. 1.
Connect the RCA video output port to the test monitor. RCA video output port.
2.
Connect the other end of the network cable to any network port on the switch (powered in PoE mode). Power on the switch to power the camera.
3.
Assign one person to observe the monitor, and another person to adjust the camera to cover the position to be monitored, as a s shown in in Figure 3-3. 3-3.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
in in Figure 3-3 3-3 shows an
13
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4.
Assign one person to observe the monitor and another to adjust adjust the distance of displ displayed ayed picture by rotating button 2.
5.
3 Installing Devices
in in Figure 3-3 3-3 shows button 2.
Assign one person to observe the mon itor and another to adjus adjustt the d distance istance of displayed picture by rotating button 1.
in in Figure 3-3 3-3 shows button 1.
Figure 3-3 Adjusti Adjusting ng the camera
(1) Button 1, adjusting camera resolution
(2) Button 2, adjusting camera came ra shooting distance
(3) RCA simulation video output
(4) Securing screws
For details about how to install the camera and connect cables to it, refer to your delivered documents.
3-4.. in Figure 3-4 Step 5 Reinstall the dome cover and tighten the screws, as shown in Figure 3-4 Installi Installing ng a dome cover c over
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
3.2 Installing a Smoke Sensor Prerequisites
The object to carry the smoke sensor has been installed.
A smoke smoke sensor and tools for installing it have have bee been n prepared.
This topic describes how to install install a smoke sensor on the control skylight. For installing the sensor on different objects, perform the same steps.
The screws screw s used for mounting mounting the smoke sensor are available in the fitting ba g of its carrier. For example, if the smoke sensor is to be mounted on the control skylight, obtain the screws from the fitting bag of the control skylight.
Context
Procedure Step 1 Secure the smoke sensor base to the control skylight by using M3x10 bolts, as shown in Figure 3-5. 3-5. Figure 3-5 Installing a smoke sensor base
Step 2 Align the mounting holes on the smoke sensor with the mounting holes on the smoke sensor base, and then rotate the smoke sensor until it is secured, as shown in in Figure 3-6. 3-6.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Installing ng a smoke sensor Figure 3-6 Installi
For details about how to install the smoke sensor and connect cables to it, refer to your delivered documents.
Prior to installing the smoke sensor, properly install related cables to avoid removing it from time to time.
----End
3.3 Installing I nstalling a WS302M2A-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Humid ity Sensor Prerequisites
The object where you plan to install the ambient temperature and humidity sensor has been installed. The ambient temperature and humidity sensor and installation tools are prepared.
Context
This topic describes how to install an ambient temperature and humidity sensor on the control skylight. For installing the sensor on different objects, perform the same steps.
The screws used for mounting the ambient temperature and humidity sensor are available in the fitting bag of its carrier. For example, if the ambient temperature temper ature and a nd humidity humidity sensor is to be mounted on the control skylight, obtain the screws from the fitting bag of the control skylight.
Procedure Step 1 Secure the base of the ambient temperature and humidity humidity sensor to the control skylight ceiling by using M3x10 bolts, bolts, as shown in in Figure 3-7. 3-7.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Figure 3-7 Installing the base
Step 2 Press down the strip on the ambient temperature and humidity sensor. Align the strip with the hole in the sensor base, and then secure the ambient temperature and humidity sensor to the base, as shown in in Figure 3-8. 3-8. Figure 3-8 Installing the ambient temperature and humidity sensor
For details about how to install an ambient temperature and humidity sensor and connect its cables, see shipped documents.
Connect cables to an ambient temperature and humidity sensor before installation.
----End
3.4 Installing I nstalling a WS332M-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Humid ity Sensor Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
The object to carry the ambient temperature and humidity humidity sensor has been installed. An ambient temperature and a nd humidity humidity sensor and tools for installing it have been prepared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Context The electromagnet on the rear of the sensor can be attached to sheet metals, such as a control skylight or a cabinet.
Procedure Attach 3-9. the .sensor to where it should be installed by the electromagnet on the rear shown in Step 1 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-9 Electromagnet on the ambient temperature and humidity sensor
(1) Electromagnet
Prior to installing the ambient temperature and humidity sensor, properly install related cables to avoid removing it from time to time.
----End
3.5 Installing an Infrared Sensor Prerequisites
The object to carry the infrared sensor has been installed.
An infrared sensor and tools for installing it have been prepared.
This topic describes how to install install an infrared infrared sensor on the skylight skylight ce ceiling. iling. For installing the sensor on different objects, perform the same steps.
The screws used for mounting the infrared sensor are available in the fitting bag of its carrier. For example, if the infrared sensor is to be mounted on the control skylight, obtain the screws from the fitting bag of the control skylight.
Context
Procedure Step 1 Secure the infrared infrared sensor base to the control skylight by using M3x10 bolts, as shown in 3-10.. Figure 3-10
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Figure 3-10 Installing an infrared sensor base
Step 2 Align the mounting holes on the infrared sensor w with ith the mounting holes holes on the inf infrare rared d 3-11.. sensor base, and then rotate the infrared sensor until it is secured, as shown in in Figure 3-11 Figure 3-11 Installing an infrared sensor
For details about how to install an infrared sensor and connect cables to it, refer to your delivered documents.
Prior to installing the sensor, properly install related cables to avoid removing it from time to time.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
3.6 Installing a WLDS900 Water Sensor Prerequisites
If air is supplied from under the floor, a cofferdam has be been en inst installed alled around the air conditioners.
If air is supplied horizontally, the Smart Module has been completely installed.
Context
A water sensor consists of a water wate r detection cable, water detector, and conversion conversion cable. The water detection cable is laid out on the floor, connecting to the water detector placed near the collector by the conversion cable. cable. Figure 3-12 3-12 shows the above components. Figure 3-12 Water sensor components
(1) Water detector
(2) Conversion Conversion cable end A, connecting to the water detector
(3) Conversion Conversion cable
(4) Conversion cable end B, connecting to the water detection cable
(5) Water detection cable end A, connecting to the conversion cable
(6) Water detection cable
Lay out the water detection cable as follows. −
For air supplied from under the floor: Lay out the cable around the air conditioner cofferdam.
−
For air supplied horizontally: Lay out the cable on the floor around the Smart Module.
Choose a proper installation place for the water detection cable based on site requirements.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Procedure 3-13 shows how to connect the water detection cable to the conversion cable. Step 1 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-13 Connecting water detection cable to the conversion cable
(1) Conversion cable end B, connecting c onnecting to the water detection cable
(2) Water detection detection cable end A, connecting to the conversion cable
The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through the male and female connectors.
3-14.. Step 2 Connect the other end of the conversion cable to the water detector, as shown in in Figure 3-14 Figure 3-14 Water detector
Step 3 Plan the installation position for the fastener of the water detection cable. Ensure that the water detection cable placed on the fastener is in good contact with the floor.
Step 4 Tear off the protection paper on the rear of the fastener, then securely attach the fastener to the floor.
If the fastener fails to be securely attached to the floor, perform perform Step 5. 5.
If the fastener can be securely attached to the floor, perform perform Step 6 6..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Step 5 Drill holes on the floor with the same dimensions as the expansion bolts for the fastener. Use the expansion bolts and screws scre ws to secure the fastener to the floor, floor, as shown in in Figure 3-15. 3-15. Figure 3-15 Installing a fastener
When laying out the water detection cable, ensure that the water detector is close to the integrated cabling cabinet as to facilitate further cable connections.
Step 6 Place the water detection cable to the fastener, secure the fastener, and force the water detection cable to close c lose to the floor, as shown in in Figure 3-16 3-16.. Figure 3-16 Securing a water detection cable
If several water detection cables are connected in series, connect the male connector of one cable to the female connector of another cable.
Step 7 For air supplied from under the floor: Stand the water detector out of the raised floor or base to facilitate further cable connections.
Step 8 For air supplied horizontally: Place the water detector on the floor to facilitate further cable connections. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
3.7 Installing I nstalling the the WCON-22Z Skylight Ceiling Controller Prerequisites The skylight ceiling controller and installation tools are prepared.
Context
The skylight ceiling controller should be installed insta lled on the out side of the controll c ontrolled ed skylight ceiling.
Please take the screws in the attached bag of the controlled skylight ceiling.
Procedure Step 1 Place a skylight ceiling controller in the appropriate position on the controlled skylight ceiling, and secure it by using screws. Figure 3-17 Installing the skylight ceiling controller
----End
3.8 Installing I nstalling the the WCON-14Z Skylight Ceiling Controller Prerequisites The skylight ceiling controller and installation tools are prepared.
Context The skylight ceiling controller should be installed in the server cabinet.
Procedure Step 1 Determine the skylight ceiling controller mounting holes in the server cabinet according to the engineering drawing. Secure two floating nuts to each rack rail of the cabinet by using a floating nut mounting bar, as shown in in Figure 3-18. 3-18. Ensure that the floating nuts are at the same level.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
3 Installing Devices
Figure 3-18 Installing a floating nut
Step 2 Place a skylight ceiling controller in front of the server cabinet. Step 3 Remove the ground nuts from the side of the skylight ceiling controller. Please roate the mounting ear of the skylight ceiling controller 180 degrees before place the skylight ceiling controller into the serv ser ver ccabinet, abinet, as shown in in Figure 3-19. 3-19.
Step 4 Place the skylight ceiling controller into the server cabinet. Tighten the M6 screws on the left and right mounting ears clockwise and fix the skylight ceiling controller in the server cabinet, as shown in step 3 of Figure 3-19. 3-19. Figure 3-19 Installing a skylight ceiling controller
----End
3.9 Installing I nstalling the the Lighting Control Box The lighting control box is installed in the server cabinet by using mounting ears and screws. Perform the same steps to install the lighting control box as installing the skylight ceiling Ceiling iling Controller Controller . controller. For details, see see 3.8 Installing the WCON-14Z Skylight Ce
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices Devices
Cable connections specified in this document are based on the cable connection sequences specified in Preparing a Monitoring Cable . Connect cables in required sequences se quences by referring to Preparing a Monitoring Cable to prevent device device connection connec tion failures. Unless otherwise specified, all network cables in this document are crossover cables.
4.1 Scenarios for Connecting the server 4.1.1 Server Port Description Ports on the RH2288H rear panel Figure 4-1 Ports on the RH2288H rear panel
Table 4-1 RH2288H port description
No.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Interface Type
Description
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
No.
Interface Type
Description
1
eth0 GE interface
2
eth1 GE
Used for connecting to the LAN switch. eth0 and eth1 comprise a bond, which is used for providing external services.
3
interface eth2 GE interface
4
If southbound and northbound network isolation is not adopted, only eth0 or eth1 is required.
If southbound and northbound network isolat isolation ion is adopted, both eth0 (or eth1) and eth2 (eth3) are required.
eth3 GE interface
eth0 (or eth1) e th1) is used for providing southbound southbound services while eth2 (or eth3) is used for pro providi viding ng northbound services.
5
USB interface
Used for connecting to the USB service or the KVM.
6
iBMC management interface
Used for connecting to the PC computer to manage the RH2288H V3 server.
7
VGA interface
Used for connecting to the monitor or KVM.
8
Server serial interface
Used for connecting to the SMS modem or commissioning.
Ports on the RH58 RH5885 85 rear panel Figure 4-2 Ports on the RH5885 rear panel
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-2 RH5885 port description
No.
Interface Type
Description
1
eth0 GE interface
Used for connecting to the LAN switch. eth0 and eth1 comprise a bond, which is used for providing external services.
2
eth1 GE interface
3
eth2 GE interface
4
eth3 GE interface
If southbound and northbound network isolat isolation ion is not adopted, only eth0 or eth1 is required.
If southbound and northbound network isolat isolation ion is adopted, both eth0 (or eth1) and eth2 (eth3) are required. eth0 (or eth1) e th1) is used for providing southbound southbound services while eth2 (or eth3) is used for providing northbound services.
5
Server serial interface
Used for connecting to the SMS modem or commissioning.
6
VGA interface
Used for connecting to the monitor or KVM.
7
USB interface
Used for connecting to the USB servi ser vice ce or the KVM.
8
iMana management network interface
Used for connecting connect ing to the PC to manage the RH5885 V3 server.
4.1.2 Installing the the SMS Modem Prerequisites An idle serial port is available on the server.
Context Figure 4-3 4-3 shows the ports on the SMS modem. Figure 4-3 Ports on the SMS modem
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
(1) Connecting Connecting to the SIM card
(2) Connecting to the antenna
(3) Connecting Connecting to the power cable
(4) Serial port
Procedure Step 1 Insert a SIM card into the SMS modem. Use a tool such as the small screwdriver to press the yellow key. Put the SIM card on the ejected tray, and insert the tray into the SMS modem.
Step 2 Connect the antenna to the antenna connector. Step 3 Connect the serial port cable. One end of the cable connects the SMS modem and the other end connects an idle serial port on the server, serial port on the server see Server Port Description . For details, see the user manual delivered with the SMS modem. Use the connector convertor delivered with the SMS modem if the connector of the serial cable does not match the serial port on the server.
Step 4 Connect the power cable. Use the power adapter with the SMS modem.
Connect one end of the power adapter to the SMS modem, for details, see the specifications delivered with the SMS modem.
Connect the other end e nd of the power adapter to the 220V power. power.
After the power powe r cable is connected, switch on the power. Normally, Normally, the indicator of the SMS modem b links links regularly r egularly.. Table 4-3 4-3 shows how the indicator indicates the work status of the SMS modem. Table 4-3 Relations between the status of the indicator and the SMS modem
Indicator
Modem The SMS modem is activated and is not registered with
On
the network. The SMS modem is connected to the network and is in idle mode.
Blinks slowly Blinks quickly
The SMS modem is in transmission mode.
Off
The SMS modem is deact deactiv ivated. ated.
Step 5 Install the SMS modem driver. To install the SMS modem driver, see the specifications delivered with the SMS modem. You need to install the driver only when the installation of the driver is required in the specifications delivered with the SMS modem.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
----End
4.2 Scenarios for Connecting the the LAN Switch 4.2.1 Switch Port Figure 4-4 and Table 4-4 4 -4 show the switch ports. The switch with eight ports is used as an 4-4 and example. Figure 4-4 Switch ports
Table 4-4 Switch port description
No.
Description
1
Connects to the server, collector, collector, camera, and access controller.
2
Port for large workload (connecting to the Internet)
4.2.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Camera Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
An idle network port supporting the PoE function is availab available le on the LAN switch.
The camera has the PoE function.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the monitoring port on the camera to any network port on the switch by using the network cable. The switch is powered by using the power over Ethernet (PoE) technology.
Device cables not mentioned ment ioned in the document do not need to be connected onsite and should be insulated only. only. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.2.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable for the A8802T or A8804T Door Access Controller Context The access acce ss controller uses the 220 V power supply. supply.
Device cables not mentioned ment ioned in the document do not need to be connected onsite and should be insulated only. only.
General Cable Connections to a Door Access System When connecting the door access system, you need to connect a door access controller, a switch, a door exit button, access card reader, electromagnetic double-swing door lock, and emergency door release button (a break glass switch is configured optionally). optionally). Figure 4-5 4-5 shows the general cable connections to the door access system. Figure 4-5 General cable connections to a door access system
(1) Network port, connecting a network cable to a switch
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
(2) Connecting to the door exit button and access card reader
(3) Connecting to the electromagnetic electroma gnetic double-swing door lock and the emergency door release button (a break glass switch is configured optionally)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Connecting a Door Exit Button and an Access Card Reader Figure 4-6 connection tionss to the door access controller, door exit button, and 4-6 shows the cable connec access card reader. Figure 4-6 Connecting a door exit button and an access card reader
Connecting an Electromagnetic Double-Swing Door Lock and an Emergency Door Release Button (a Break Glass Switch is Configured Optionally) 4-7 shows the cable connections to the electromagnetic double-swing door lock and an Figure 4-7 emergency door release button (a break glass switch is configured optionally). The cable installation sequences shown in the following figure are for reference only. If any differences exist between the wiring diagram and this figure, the wiring diagram prevails.
Figure 4-7 Connecting an electromagnetic double-swing door lock and an emergency door release button butt on (a break break glass glass swit switch ch is configur configured ed option optionall ally) y)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Related Information Table 4-5 Card reader, key terminal definition
Terminal identity
Definition
BT
Key input input
R-AL
Card reader pry signal input
R-BP
Control card reader buzzer
R-LED
Control card reader LED lights
R-D1
Card reader data 1
R-D0
Card reader data 0
R-Gnd
Card reader public public ground
R-12V
Reader power + 12 V
Table 4-6 Locks, door magnetic terminal definition
Terminal identity
Definition
LK+
Lock output power +
LK-
Lock output power -/ Passive Passive output -
NP
Passive output +
LKS
Lock signal input +
ST
Door magnetic signal input +
Gnd
Common ground
Table 4-7 Alarm input terminal definition
Terminal identity
Definition
AL(1-2)
Two door controller No power suppl supply y output signal
AL(1-4)
Four door controller No power suppl supply y output signal
Gnd
Common ground
Table 4-8 Power terminal definition
Terminal identity LK-P
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Definition +12V
Lock the power inpu inputt + 12 V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Terminal identity
BAT
DC
AC
Definition GND
Lock the power inpu inputt -
+
Battery +
-
Battery -
+12V
The controller + 12 V DC power DC inpu inputt
GND
Controller DC power input-
11V
The controller 11 V AC power inpu inputt
Table 4-9 Indicator light definition
Terminal identity
Definition
P
The controller power light light,, red
RUN
Controller working indicator indicator light, white blue, flashing
LK(1-4)
Lock status indicator indicator light
Table 4-10 RS485 interface
Terminal identity
Definition
AL3(A8802T)/ AL5(A8804T)
RS485-A
Gnd
RS485-B
4.2.4 (Optional) Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an NVR6128G2 Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure 4-8 Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet Ether net port on the NVR6128G2. NVR6128G2. Figure 4-8 shows the ports on the NVR6128G2.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-8 Ports on the NVR6128G2
(1) Gigabit Ethernet port 1 (namely eth 0) (without an initial IP address before factory delivery)
(2) Gigabit Ethernet port 2 (namely eth 1) (with a default IP address 192.168.1.100 before factory delivery)
When connecting network cables from the switch to the NVR6128G2 for the first time, connect the network cable to Gigabit Ethernet port 2. After an IP address is assigned to the network interface card (NIC) and the Bound network adapter function is used, the network cable can be connected from the switch to Gigabit Ethernet port 1 or 2. For details about how to assign an IP address to the NIC and to use the Bound network adapter function, see Configuring IP Addresses vers.. Addresses of Management Ser vers
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a VCN500 Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Context The VCN500 has two types of power modules. This section describes the VCN500 ports using one type of the power module module as an example. If the other type of power module is used onsite, the actual scenario prevails.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the GE1 port on the VCN500. Figure 4-9 VCN500 ports
(1) Ground point
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
(2) GE2 port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
(3) Power switch
34
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
(4) Power input port
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
(5) GE1 port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN switch. ----End
4.2.6 Connecting the Air Conditioner Monitoring Cable 4.2.6.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an ACRD502 Air Cond Conditioner itioner Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the network port on the ACRD502 air conditioner. Figure 4-10 4-10 shows the ports on the ACRD502 air conditioner. Figure 4-10 Ports on the ACRD502 air conditioner
(1) Network port used for connecting to a switch
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
----End
4.2.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PEX Air Conditio Conditioner ner Prerequisites
A network cable is prepared for monitoring over the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared for monitoring over Modbus.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU collector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context The NetEco can communicate with a PEX air conditioner over SNMP or Modbus. The two communication modes require different cable connections.
If they communicate over SNMP SNMP,, connect connec t the TCP/IP card in the PEX air a ir conditioner conditioner to the switch.
If they communicate over Modbus, connect the RS485 card in the PEX air conditioner to the collector.
Procedure Step 1 Determine the protocol type.
If they communicate over SNMP SNMP,, see see Step 2 2..
If they communicate over Modbus, see see Step 4. 4.
Step 2 In SNMP communication mode, connect one end of the network cable to the network port on the TCP/IP card, as shown in in Figure 4-11. 4-11. Figure 4-11 TCP/IP card in the PEX air conditioner
(1) Network port
Step 3 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. Step 4 In Modbus communication mode, connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring 4-12.. Table 4-11 4-11 lists cable to the RS485 card car d in the PEX air conditioner, conditioner, aass shown in in Figure 4-12
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
the mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Figure 4-12 RS485 card in the PEX air a ir conditioner conditioner
(1) RS485 port
Table 4-11 Mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector
Wiring Terminal on the
Connected
RS485 Card
CCU collector
+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
+
First core (Orange and white)
-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Cord End Terminal
Step 5 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port (RS485 protocol) on the collector. ----End
4.2.6.3 Connecting the NetCol5000(A042/A035/A020/C030) NetCol5000(A042/A035/A020/C030) and NetCol8000(C070/C150) Air Conditioner Monitoring Cable Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Context When NetCol5000-A042, NetCol5000-A035, NetCol5000-A020, NetCol5000-C030, NetCol8000-C070, and NetCol8000-C150 connect to the NetEco over Modbus-TCP, Modbus-TCP, connect cables by referring to this section.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cab Cables les to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the monitoring port on the air conditioner.
For NetCol5000-A035 and NetCol5000-A020, open the front door, and connect one end of the network cable to the FE port on the side of the air conditioner LCD.
Figure 4-13 FE ports on the NetCol5000-A035, NetCol5000-A020 NetCol5000-A020
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
For NetCol5000-A042, NetCol8000-C070, and a nd NetCol8000-C150, NetCol8000-C150, open the rear door, door, and connect one end of the network cable c able to the FE_1 port on the main control module of the air conditioner.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-14 Position of the NetCol5000-A042 main control module
(1) Main control module
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-15 Positions of the NetCol8000-C070 and NetCol8000-C150 main control modules
(1) Main control module
Figure 4-16 Main Control Module
(1) FE_1 port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN switch. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.2.7 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable 4.2.7.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a HIPULSE-NXL UPS Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM1 or COM2 port on the HIPULSE-NXL UPS, as shown in in Figure 4-17. 4-17. Figure 4-17 Ports on the HIPULSE-NXL UPS
(1) RUN indicator
(2) COM1 port
(3) COM2 port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.7.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Galaxy7000 UPS Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the TCP/IP card in the Galaxy7000 UPS.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.2.7.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Riello UPS Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the TCP/IP card in the Riello UPS.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.7.4 Connecting the UPS2000-G Monitoring Cable (SNMP) Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the Ethernet port on the SNMP card of the UPS2000-G. Figure 4-18 Ethernet port
(1) Ethernet port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.2.7.5 Connecting the UPS5000G-A Monitoring Monitoring Cable Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the FE port of the UPS5000-A. Figure 4-19 UPS5000-A-30 kVA/40 kVA functional components and control signal ports
(1) FE port
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-20 UPS5000-A-60 kVA/80 kVA/120 kVA functional components and control signal ports ports
(1) FE port
Figure 4-21 FE port on the UPS monitoring module of the 300 kVA UPS and models with higher capacities
(1) FE port
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.7.6 Connecting the UPS5000-E or UPS5000-S Monitoring Cable Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of a network cable to the FE port on the UPS5000-E/UPS5000-S monitoring module.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN switch. ----End
4.2.8 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the FE port in the display panel of PDU8000, as shown in in Figure 4-22. 4-22. Figure 4-22 Connecting the PDU8000 monitoring cable (FE port)
(1) FE port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the LAN switch. ----End
4.2.9 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to TP483000D Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the fast Ethernet (FE) port on TP483000D. Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.10 Connecting a Monitoring Monitoring Cable to an RH2288 IPMI Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the BMC management network port on the RH2288. Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.2.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a CIM01C2 Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the PoE port on the CIM. Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. ----End
4.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC500 Collector 4.3.1 Preparing a Monitoring Cable Prerequisites
A twisted pair, cord end terminal, and RJ45 connector are prepared.
The following tools are prepared:
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
−
Wi Wire re str ipper
−
Crimping tool
−
RJ11 RJ1 1 crimping tool
−
Electrician's knife
−
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation tape
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Preparing a Cord End Terminal 4-23 shows how to prepare a cord end terminal. Figure 4-23 Figure 4-23 Preparing a cord end terminal
Preparing the RS485 Monitoring Cable Figure 4-24 4-24 and and Figure Figure 4-25 4- 25 shows how to prepare a cord end terminal. Figure 4-24 Preparing the RS485 monitoring cable for CCU collector
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-25 Preparing the RS485 monitoring cable for ECC collector
Preparing a Dry Contact Monitoring Cable The method of preparing a dry contact monitoring cable is similar to the method of preparing the RS485 monitoring cable. Prepare cord end terminals on both ends of each required core wire based on the number of dry contacts.
4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector The following tables describe the ports on the CCU collector. A CCU collector provides slots for one main control card aand nd two expansion cards. The CCU collector used in NetEco V600R007C80 is configured with an environment monitor expand unit (EEU), Uart expand unit unit (UEU), and temperature control unit unit (TCU). Table 4-12 Description of ports on the main control card
Port
Description
FE[0:1]
Two standard 10/100M fast Ethernet (FE) ports that are used to communicate with Huawei communications equipment and the NetEco.
FE2
One standard 10/100M FE port that is used to communicate with Huawei communications equipment and the NetEco. Priority to select this port while connect collector and switch.
ELU
The port connects to an electronic label.
UP_COM[0:1]
Two uplink RS485 ports support communication communicat ion with Huawei communications equipment inside the cabinet.
D_COM[0:3]
Four downlink RS485 ports manage electromechanical components inside the cabinet. Each port manages eight components, such as the ambient temperature and humidity sensor, alternating current (AC)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Port
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Description transfer switch (ATS), and uninterruptible power supply (UPS). NOTE The ambient temperature and humidity sensor connects only to COM3 port.
TEM_HUM
The port monitors monitors the ambient temperature and humidity.
TEM
One port dedicated to the temperature sensor (DS1820) monitors ambient temperatures.
WATER
The port connects to a water sensor.
SMOKE
The port connects to a smoke sensor.
GATE
The port connects to a door status sensor.
IN[0:4]
Five ports detect Boolean values.
Power port
The port supports standard quick-connect terminals and receives -48 V power supply.
Table 4-13 Description of FE[0:1] port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
TX+
Transmit end
2 Orange
TX-
3 Green and white
RX+
Positive receive end
4 Blue
GND
Ground end
5 Blue and white
GND
6 Green
RX-
7 Brown and white
GND
8 Brown
GND
Negative receive end
Ground end
Table 4-14 Description of FE2 port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
TX+
Transmit end
2 Orange
TX-
3 Green and white
RX+
Positive receive end
4 Blue
GND
Ground end
5 Blue and white
GND
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
No.
Pin
Description
6 Green
RX-
Negative rece receiv ivee end
7 Brown and white
RS232_RX
Used as a general network port
8 Brown
RS232_TX
Used as a general network port
Table 4-15 Description of UP_COM[0:1] port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
TX+
RS485 transmit end
2 Orange
TX-
3 Green and white
ALM_ALL-
Negative main alarm output
4 Blue
RX+
RS485 receive end
5 Blue and white
RX-
6 Green
Ready input
Address identification input
7 Brown and white
ALM_ALL+
Positive main alarm output
8 Brown
GND
Ground end
Table 4-16 Description of D_COM[0:2] port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
RX+
RS485 receive end
2 Orange
RX-
3 Green and white
NC
Floated
4 Blue
TX+
RS485 transmit end
5 Blue and white
TX-
6 Green
GND
Address identification output, low level
7 Brown and white
NC
Floated
8 Brown
GND
Ground end
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-17 Description of D_COM3 port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
RX+
RS485 receive end
2 Orange
RX-
3 Green and white
12V
12 V power output
4 Blue
TX+
RS485 transmit end
5 Blue and white
TX-
6 Green
GND
Address identification output, low level
7 Brown and white
NC
Floated
8 Brown
GND
Ground end
Table 4-18 Description of ELU port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
3V3
3.3 V power output
2 Orange
NC
Floated
3 Green and white
GND
Ground end
4 Blue
SDA
I2C communication port
5 Blue and white
SCL
6 Green
NC
7 Brown and white
NC
8 Brown
NC
Floated
Table 4-19 Description of TEM_HUM port pins
No.
Pin
Description
Pin1
12V
12 V power output
Pin2
TEM_IN
Temperature analog parameter input
Pin3
12V
12 V power output
Pin4
HUM_IN
Humidity analog parameter input
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
51
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-20 Description of TEM port pins
No.
Pin
Description
Pin1
3V3
3.3 V power output
Pin2
TEM_IN
Temperature detection digital parameter input
Pin3
GND
Ground end
Pin4
NC
Floated
Table 4-21 Description of WATER port pins
No.
Pin
Description
Pin1
12V
12 V power output
Pin2
WATER_IN
Water detection signal input
Pin3
GND
Ground end
Pin4
NC
Floated
Table 4-22 Description of SMOKE port pins
No.
Pin
Description
Pin1
12V
12 V power output
Pin2
SMOKE_IN
Smoke detection signal input
Table 4-23 Description of GATE and IN[0:4] port pins
Name
Pin
Description
GATE
Pin+
Positive door status input end
Pin-
Negative door status inpu inputt end
Pin+
Positive dry contact 0 inpu inputt end
Pin-
Negative dry contact 0 input end
Pin+
Positive dry contact 1 inpu inputt
IN0
IN1
end
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
52
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Name
IN2
IN3
IN4
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Pin
Description
Pin-
Negative dry contact 1 input end
Pin+
Positive dry contact 2 inpu inputt end
Pin-
Negative dry contact 2 input end
Pin+
Positive dry contact 3 inpu inputt end
Pin-
Negative dry contact 3 input end
Pin+
Positive dry contact 4 inpu inputt end
Pin-
Negative dry contact 4 input end
Table 4-24 Description of ports on the EEU environment expansion card
Port
Description
ALM_IN
The port connects to an infrared infrared sensor or a vibration vibration sensor.
IN[0:4]
The port detects Boolean Boolean values.
DO
The port exports control values.
AD_IN[0:1]
The port monitors monitors the ambient temperature and humidity.
Table 4-25 Description of ALM_IN port pins
No.
Pin
Description
Pin1
12V
12 V power output
Pin2
GND
GND
Pin3
+
Positive sensor Boolean value input end
Pin4
-
Negative sensor Boolean value input end
Table 4-26 Description of DI[0:4] port pins
Name
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Pin
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Description
53
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Name
Pin
Description
DI[0:4]
+
Positive Boolean value input end
-
Negative Boolean value input end
Table 4-27 Description of DO port pins
Name
Pin
Description
DO
N
Central contact
O
Normally open (NO) contact
Table 4-28 Description of AD_IN[0:1] port pins
Name
Pin
Description
AD_IN[0:1]
12V
12 V power output
GND
GND
A0/A2
Temperature analog parameter input
A1/A3
Humidity analog parameter input
Table 4-29 Description of ports on the UEU serial port expansion card
Port
Description
D_COM[0:3]
Four downlink RS485 ports connect to components with RS485 ports.
RS232
One RS232 port connects to components with RS232 ports.
Table 4-30 Description of RS232 port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
NC
Floated
2 Orange
NC
3 Green and white
TX
RS485 transmit end
4 Blue
GND
Ground end
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
54
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
No.
Pin
Description
5 Blue and white
GND
6 Green
RX
RS485 receive end
7 Brown and white
NC
Floated
8 Brown
NC
Table 4-31 Description of D_COM3 port pins
No.
Pin
Description
1 Orange and white
RX+
RS485 receive end
2 Orange
RX-
3 Green and white
12V
12 V power output
4 Blue
TX+
RS485 transmit end
5 Blue and white 6 Green
TXGND
7 Brown and white
NC
Floated
8 Brown
GND
Ground end
Address identification output, low level
Table 4-32 Description of ports on the TCU expansion card
Port
Description
VALVE
The port controls the valve.
TEM[0:4]
Five ports connect to temperature sensors.
Power port
The port receives 220 V AC power supply. supply.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
55
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.3 Port Description for ECC500 Collector Figure 4-26 ECC500 Collector
(1) Sl Slot ot 1: GPRS expansion card (MUC01A/MUC02A) (MUC01A/MUC02A)
(2) Slot Slot 2: Reserved
(3) Sl Slot ot 3: RS485 expansion card
(4) Slot Slot 4: AI/DI expansion card
4.3.3.1 RS485 Communication Card The RS485 communication card provides five half-duplex RS485 communication interfaces that are compatible with two-wire and four-wire cables and connect to the southbound intelligent equipment, Independent Deployment AI/DI Unit, and intelligent ambient temperature and humidity humidity sensor. sensor. Figure 4-27 4-27 shows ports on the front panel of the RS485 communication card. Figure 4-27 Front panel of the RS485 communication card
(1) COM1 port
(2) COM2 port
(3) COM3 port
(4) COM4/12V port
(5) COM5/12V port
(6) Indicators Indicators
4-33 describes indicators on the front panel of the RS485 communication card. Table 4-33 Table 4-33 Description of indicators on the front panel of the RS485 communication card
Silk Screen
Color
Meaning
Status
Description
PWR
Green
Power indicator indicator
Steady on
The power supply is normal.
Off
The RS485 communication
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
56
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Silk Screen
Color
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Meaning
Status
Description card is faulty or has no DC input.
RUN
ALM
COM4/12V
Green
Red
Gree n Green
Run indi indicator cator
Alarm indicator indicator
Port power output indicator
COM5/12V
Blinking (1 second on and 1 second off)
The RS485 communication card is communicating with the main control module properly.
Blinking (0.125 second on and 0.125 second off)
The RS485 communication card fails to communicate with the main control module.
Off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
A board alarm is generated.
Steady on
The port properly provides the 12 V DC output.
Off
The port provides no 12 V DC output.
4-34 describes ports on the front panel of the RS485 communication card. Table 4-34 Table 4-34 Description of ports on the front panel of the RS485 communication card
Silk Screen
Port Description
COM1, COM2, and COM3
Connect to intelligent equipment, such as the PDU8000, UPS, and cooling equipment.
COM4/12V and COM5/12V
1: A
2: B
4: A
5: B
Provide DC outputs of 12 V (actual range: 12.8-15 V), 400 mA to equipment such as Independent Deployment AI/DI Unit, intelligent ambient temperature and humidity sensors, and electronic door locks.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
1: A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
57
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Silk Screen
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Port Description
2: B
3: 12 V DC power
4: A
5: B
8: GND
COM4/12V and COM5/12V ports: Pins 3 and 8 of these two ports pro vide 12 V DC power. Therefore, before connecting equipment to the ports, check the equipment pin description to ensure that pins of the equipment match those on the ports, preventing damage to ports or the equipment.
If an RS232 port transfers to an RS485 port and connects c onnects to an RS485 communications card, one COM port connects to only one RS232 device. The recommended COM port is COM1, COM2, or COM3.
The internal circuit design of the RS485 communication card allows its COM port to support two-wire RS485 and four-wire RS422, eliminating the need to cascade cables, as shown in Figure 4-28 4-28.. Figure 4-28 Compatibility of the RS485 interfaces
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
58
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.3.2 AI/DI Expansion Card The AI/DI expansion card provi pr ovides des four AI/DI input ports to connect c onnect monitoring sensors and provide the DO control function. function. Figure 4-29 4-29 shows ports on the front panel of the AI/DI expansion card. Figure 4-29 Front panel of the AI/DI expansion card
(1) DO control
(2) AI/DI_1
(3) AI/DI_2
(4) AI/DI_3
(5) AI/DI_4
(6) Indicators Indicators
Table 4-35 4-35 describes indicators on the front panel of the AI/DI expansion card. Table 4-35 Description of indicators on the front panel of the AI/DI expansion card
Silk Screen
Color
Meaning
Status
Description
PWR
Green
Power indicator indicator
Steady on
The power supply is normal.
Off
The AI/DI expansion card is faulty or has no DC input.
Blinking second on(1and 1 second off)
The AI/DI card expansion is communicating with the main control module properly.
Blinking (0.125 second on and 0.125 second off)
The AI/DI expansion card fails to communicate with the main control module.
Off
No alarm is
RUN
ALM
Green
Red
Run indi indicator cator
Alarm indicator indicator
generated.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
59
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Silk Screen
Color
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Meaning
Status
Description
Steady on
A board alarm is generated.
4-36 describes ports on the front panel of the AI/DI expansion card. Table 4-36 Table 4-36 Description of ports on the front panel of the AI/DI expansion card
Silk Screen
Port Description
DO
Provides the DO control function.
12V/0.3A
AI/DI_1, AI/DI_2, AI/DI_3, and AI/DI_4
NO COM
Provides a 12 V DC output for supplying less than 300 mA power to devices such as the audible and visual alarms.
12 V DC, 300 mA
GND
Provide 12 V DC outputs for sensors and a nd are compatible with 4 mA m A to 20 mA current signals, signals from current-based smoke sensors and water sensors, dry contact signals, and NTC signals. Pin definition:
3: 12 V DC, 54 mA
6: D-
7: D+
8: GND
Do not connect an active sensor to an AI/DI port. Otherwise, the port will be invalid.
Sensors including 4 mA to 20 mA sensors, door status sensors, water sensors, and smoke sensors
provide data data ffor or the p ports. orts. The power supply of each AI/DI port can be separately controlled. Each port provides a maximum of 14.6 V, 54 mA output power.
4.3.3.3 GPRS Expansion Card Two models of GPRS expansion cards ca rds are av available, ailable, includi including ng MUC01A and MUC02A expansion cards. cards. Table 4-37 4-37 describes the differences between the two models. Table 4-37 GPRS expansion card differences
Expansion Card Model
Number of SIM Card Slots
MUC01A
1
MUC02A
2
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
60
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
MUC01A 4-30 shows the front panel of the MUC01A expansion card. Figure 4-30 Figure 4-30 Front panel of the MUC01A expansion card
(1) DO_1
(2) DO_2
(3) DI_1
(4) DI_2
(5) DI_3
(6) DI_4
(7) DI_5
(8) DI_6
(9) ANT
(10) Indicators
4-31 shows the SIM car card d slot on the MUC M UC01A 01A expansion card. Figure 4-31 Figure 4-31 SIM card slot
MUC02A Figure 4-32 4-32 shows the front panel of the MUC02A expansion card.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
61
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-32 Front panel of the MUC02A expansion card
(1) DO_1
(2) DO_2
(3) DI_1
(4) DI_2
(5) DI_3
(6) DI_4
(7) DI_5
(8) DI_6
(9) ANT
(10) Indicators
4-33 shows the SIM card slot on the MUC02A expansion card. Figure 4-33 Figure 4-33 SIM card slot
Indicators Table 4-38 4-38 describes the indicators on the front panel of the GPRS expansion card.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
62
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-38 Indicator description
Silk Screen
Color
Status
Description
PWR1
Yellow
Steady on
The GPRS board has normal power supply.
Off
The power suppl supply y is faulty or there is no DC power input.
Steady on
The GPRS expansion card in the GPRS board is working properly.
Off
The GPRS expansion card in the GPRS board is faulty or has no DC power input.
Off
The GPRS
PWR2
GPRS
Yellow
Green
expansion card in the GPRS board is not powered on. Steady on
A GPRS call is in progress.
Blinking (on for 0.1s, then off for 0.025s)
GPRS data transmission is in progress.
Blinking (on for 0.1s, then off for 2.9s)
The GPRS card has registered with a network but is idle.
Blinking (on for 0.1s, then off for 0.9s)
No SIM card is installed, the PIN is not decoded, or network search is in progress.
Ports Table 4-39 4-39 describes the ports on the GPRS expansion card. Table 4-39 Ports on the front panel of the GPRS expansion card
Silk Screen
Port
DO_1
Dry contact output.
DO_2
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Reserved.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
63
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Silk Screen
Port
DI_1
Dry contact inpu input. t.
DI_2 DI_3
Default setting:
Open: normal
Closed: alarm
DI_4 DI_5 DI_6 ANT
Used to connect the GPRS antenna.
4.3.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the NetEco Procedure Step 1 Connect monitoring cables to the RH2288/RH2288H/RH5885 server, switch with eight ports, and CCU collector. collector. Figure 4-34 4-34,, Figure Figure 4-35 4-35,, Figure 4-36 4-36 shows the wiring diagram. Figure 4-34 RH2288 server wiring diagram diagram (CCU ( CCU collecto collector) r)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
64
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
RH2288H H serv ser ver wiring w iring diagram (CCU collector) Figure 4-35 RH2288
Figure 4-36 RH5885 server wiring diagram diagram (CCU ( CCU collecto collector) r)
Step 2 Connect monitoring cables to the RH2288/RH2288H/RH5885 server, switch with eight ports, 4-37,, Figure 4-38 4-38,, Figure Figure 4-39 4- 39sshows the wiring diagram. and ECC collector. collector. Figure 4-37
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
65
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
diagram (ECC (E CC collector) Figure 4-37 RH2288 server wiring diagram
Figure 4-38 RH2288 RH2288H H serv ser ver wiring w iring diagram (ECC collector)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
66
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
diagram (ECC (E CC collector) Figure 4-39 RH5885 server wiring diagram
----End
4.3.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Independent Deployment AI/DI Unit Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM_IN port on the independent deployment AI/DI unit.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port with 12 V power supply on the collector.
Step 3 (Optional) If multiple independent deployment AI/DI units need to be cascaded, connect the COM_IN port on one independent deployment AI/DI unit to the COM_OUT port on another independent deployment AI/DI unit. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
67
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.6 Connecting Sensors Cable 4.3.6.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Door Status Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared. You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context When connecting the door status sensor to an a n ECC collector, you need to pe perform rform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable.
Procedure Step 1 Open the door status sensor, connect two cables, as shown in in Figure 4-40 4-40.. Figure 4-40 Connecting a monitoring cable to the door status sensor
Step 2 If connected to a CCU collector, the two monitoring cables should connect to the GATA port or one of the IN0 to IN4 ports.
Step 3 If connected to an ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following to the Cable. instruction in in 4.3.1 Preparing Pre paring a Monitoring Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
68
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
2.
Connect the green core wire 6 and the brown-white core wire 7 to the cables routed out from the door status sensor.
3.
Connect one end of the RJ45 network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
----End
4.3.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e ffor or the SD-09A-HWA Curre Current-T nt-Type ype Smoke Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU collector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before connecting an SD-09 A-HWA A-HWA current type smoke sensor and the ECC collector, you need to perform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable.
Procedure Step 1 If connected to a CCU collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Install the converter delivered with the smoke sensor on the smoke sensor.
2.
Connect the cord end terminal on one end of the monitoring cable to the converter on the smoke sensor.
3.
Connect the cord end terminal on the other end of the monitoring cable to the dry contact wiring terminal on the CCU collector.
Step 2 If connected to an ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following to the instruction in in 4.3.1 Pre Preparing paring a Monitoring Cable. Cable.
2.
Short-circuit core wires 1, 5, and 8 on the other end of the network cable.
3.
Use core wires 3 and 6 of the cable as two cord end terminals.
4.
Install the converter delivered with the smoke sensor on the smoke sensor.
5.
Connect the two cord cor d end terminals to the converter on the smoke sensor, regardless re gardless of polarities.
6.
Connect one end of the RJ45 network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
69
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.6.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to the SDLH-94R Dry Contact-T Contact-Type ype Smoke Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context When connecting the SDLH-94R dry contact type smoke sensor and the ECC collector, you need to perform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable.
Procedure Step 1 If connected to an a n ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following to the
2.
instruction in in 4.3.1 Pre Preparing paring a Monitoring Cable. Cable. Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable.
3.
Connect the core wires of the network cable to the cables for the smoke sensor, based on the mappings in in Table 4-40. 4-40.
Table 4-40 Connecting cables to the smoke sensor
Core Wires of the Network Cable
Cables for the Smoke Sensor
Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire 8 (brown)
GND (black)
Core wire 3 (green-white)
+12 V (red)
Core wire 6 (green)
Normally closed end (yellow)
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
Common end (green)
None (reserved, cable connection not required, only insulation required)
Normally opened end (blue)
4.
Connect one end of the RJ45 network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
Step 2 If connected to a skylight ceiling controller, the monitoring cable should be connected by following the instructions in in Table 4-41. 4-41. Table 4-41 Cable Terminal of the Skylight Ceiling Controller
Cables for the Smoke Sensor
Cable Terminal of the skylight ceiling controller
GND (black)
G-
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
70
Issue 06 (2018 07 13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Cables for the Smoke Sensor
Cable Terminal of the skylight ceiling controller
+12 V (red)
12V+
Normally opened end (blue)
NO
Common end (green)
C
Normally closed end (yellow)
None (reserved, cable connection not required, only insulation required)
----End
4.3.6.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WS302M2A-5 WS302M2 A-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descripti Descr iption on for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Remove the rear cover from the sensor to expose the interior panel. Step 2 Connect the cord end terminal on the monitoring cable to the ambient temperature and humidity sensor based on on Table 4-42. 4-42. Table 4-42 Mapping between the ports on the ambient temperature and humidity sensor and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Port on the Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
+
Third core (green and white)
A
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
B
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
-
Eighth core (brown)
+
Third core (green and white)
A
First core (orange and white)
B
Second core (orange)
ECC collector
Issue 06 (2018 07 13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Type of the Collector Connected
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Port on the Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
-
Eighth core (brown)
Connecting the monitoring cable to the ambient temperature and humidity sensor before installing it helps reduce the times of removing and reinstalling the sensor.
Step 3 (Optional) If many humidity and temperature sensors are used and you need to connect multiple humidity and temperature sensors to a same collector port, perform the following operations to connect them in series. 1.
Connect the ports of two humidity and temperature sensors. sensors. Table 4-43 4-43 describes the connection method.
Table 4-43 Connecting humidity and temperature sensors in series
Port on the Ambient Tempera Temperature ture and Humidity Sensor 1
Connect to Humidity and Tempera Temperature ture Sensor 2 Port
+
+
A
A
B
B
-
-
Step 4 After installing the ambient temperature and humidity sensor, connect the RJ45 connector of the monitoring cable to the RS485 port on CCU collector or ECC collector that supplies 12 V power in the RS485 port.
If connected to a CCU collector, the network cable connects port D_COM3 or ports D_COM0 to D_COM3 of the UEU serial port expansion card on the CCU collector.
If connected to an ECC collector, the network cable connects the COM4/12V or COM5/12V port on the ECC collector.
----End
4.3.6.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WS332M-5 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018 07 13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Context For installing the sensor on different objects, perform the cables as follows.
If the ambient temperature tempera ture and humidity sensor is inst installed alled on the control skylight: Route the network cable c able through the hole on the re rear ar panel and then the hole on the control skylight, along the control skylight edge and cable trough.
If the ambient temperature and humidity sensor is installed on the front cabinet door: Prepare a crystal connector on site, strip the network cable by 50 to 60 mm, then connect it through the network cable c able tie on the front cabinet door, as shown in in Figure 4-41. 4-41. Use cable ties to connect connec t the cable. The network cable ca ble is laid along the cabinet door, open rack, and the cabinet cable manager, and routed out from the hole on the top of the cabinet, then pulled up to the cable ca ble trough, as shown in in Figure 4-41. 4-41. Figure 4-41 Connecting cables to the ambient temperature and humidity sensor
A: connecting to the ambient amb ient temperature and humidity sensor
B: connecting to the ECC collector
C: ambient temperature and humidity sensor
This topic describes how to install an ambient temperature and humidity sensor on the control skylight.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure in Figure 4-42. 4-42. Step 1 Remove the rear cover from the sensor to expose the interior panel, as shown in Figure 4-42 Interior panel of the ambient temperature and humidity sensor
(1) Network Networ k port (connecting to a collector)
(2) Network port (connecting to another ambient temperature and humidity sensor or being idle)
(3) Rear cover cover
(4) Interior panel
(5) Cable hole
in Figure Step 2 Connect the RJ45 end of the network cable to the network port (ports 1 and 2 shown in 4-42)) on the ambient temperature and humidity. 4-42 The two network ports function the same. Connect to either of them and leave the other idle or for connecting another ambient temperature and humidity sensor.
If two ambient temperature and humidity sensors are installed, connect one collector for each sensor.
If more than two ambient temperature and humidity sensors are installed, connect each two sensors in series and then gather them to a collector.
c able through the hole (port 5 shown in in Figure 4-42 4-42)) on the rear co ver Step 3 Route the network cable middle and then the hole on the control skylight, then along the edge of the ccontrol ontrol skylight and the cable trough.
Step 4 After installing the ambient temperature and humidity sensor, connect the RJ45 connector of the monitoring cable to the RS485 port on CCU collector or ECC collector that supplies 12 V power in the RS485 port.
If connected to a CCU collector, the network cable connects port D_COM3 or ports D_COM0 to D_COM3 of the UEU serial port expansion card on the CCU collector.
If connected to an ECC collector, the network cable connects the COM4/12V or COM5/12V port on the ECC collector.
----End
4.3.6.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an NTC Sensor Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector por ts.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the wiring port of the NTC sensor. Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable ca ble to the AI/DI port of the independent deployment AI/DI unit. ----End
4.3.6.7 Connecting Cables to the WLDS900 Water Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC co llector ports.
Context When connecting the water sensor and the CCU collector, you need perform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable.
Procedure Step 1 If connected to a CCU collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following the instruction in in 4.3.1 Prepa Preparing ring a Monitoring Cable Cable and connect the network cable to the Ethernet port on the water detector.
2.
Use core wires 3, 6, 7, and 8 on the other end of the network cable ca ble as cord end terminals 4-44.. and connect them to the ALM_IN port on the CCU collector, as shown in in Table 4-44
Table 4-44 Conne Connecting cting cables to the water sensor s ensor
ALM_IN port wiring terminal
Cord end terminal
12 V
Core wire 3 (green-white)
G
Core wire 8 (brown)
+
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
-
Core wire 6 (green)
Step 2 If connected to an ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1. 2.
Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the water detector. Connect one end of the network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
----End
4.3.6.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WLDS600 Water Sensor Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared. You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Install an RJ45 connector on one end of the network ca cable ble by following th thee instructions instructions in Preparing ing a Monitoring Cable Cab le.. 4.3.1 Prepar
Step 2 Connect wires 1, 2, 3, and 8 on the other end of the network cable to terminals RS-, RS+, DC, and DC of the water sensor, respectively, as shown in in Figure 4-43. 4-43. Figure 4-43 Connecting a cable to the water sensor
supply y on Step 3 Connect the RJ45 connector of the network cable to the COM port with 12 V power suppl the ECC collector. ----End
4.3.6.9 Connecting Cables to the SJ535A Water Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context When connecting the water sensor and the CCU collector, you need perform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable.
Procedure Step 1 Remove the rear cover from the sensor to expose the interior panel, as shown in in Figure 4-44. 4-44. Figure 4-44 Interior panel of the water sensor
(1) Network Networ k port (connecting to a collector)
(2) Network Ne twork port (connecting to a water detection detection cable)
Step 2 If connected to a CCU collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network cable by following the instruction in in 4.3.1 Prepa Preparing ring a Monitoring Cable Cable and connect the network cable to the Network port (port 1 shown in in Figure 4-44) 4-44) on the water sensor.
2.
Use core wires 3, 6, 8 on theport other the collector, network cable ca as cord end terminals 4-45.. and connect them to 7, theand ALM_IN onend the of CCU asble shown in Table in 4-45
Table 4-45 Conne Connecting cting cables to the water sensor
ALM_IN port wiring terminal
Cord end terminal
12 V
Core wire 3 (green-white)
G
Core wire 8 (brown)
+
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
-
Core wire 6 (green)
Step 3 If connected to an ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
1.
Connect one end of the network cable to the Network port on the water sensor.
2.
Connect one end of the network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
----End
4.3.6.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a Point Water Sensor Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context When connecting the point water sensor and the CCU collector, you need perform the following steps to prepare a special monitoring cable. 4-45 shows a point water se sensor. nsor. Figure 4-45 Figure 4-45 Point water sensor
Procedure Step 1 If connected to a CCU collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Prepare an RJ45 connector on one end of the network ne twork cable by following the instruction Preparing ring a Monitoring Cable Cable and connect the network cable to the Ethernet port in in 4.3.1 Prepa on the water detector.
2.
Use core wires 3, 6, 7, and 8 on the other end of the network ne twork cable as cord end terminals terminals 4-46.. and connect them to the ALM_IN port on the CCU collector, as shown in in Table 4-46
Table 4-46 Connecting cables to the point water sensor
ALM_IN port wiring terminal
Cord end terminal
12 V
Core wire 3 (green-white)
G
Core wire 8 (brown)
+
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
-
Core wire 6 (green)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Step 2 If connected to an ECC collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Connect one end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the point water sensor.
2.
Connect one end of the network cable to the AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
----End
4.3.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Hydrogen Sensor Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU collector c ollector by refer referring ring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
If the hydrogen sensor is with an a n RJ45 RS485 port, connect connec t one end of a common network cable to the hydrogen sensor RJ45 RS485 port, and connect the other end to the
Procedure
COM port on a CUU collector or on an ECC collector. If the hydrogen sensor is free from RJ45 RS485 ports, perform the following procedure. a.
Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the hydrogen sensor. sensor. Table 4-47 4-47 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal.
Table 4-47 RS485 port on the hydrogen sensor
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
A
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
B
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
ECC collector
b. ----End
A
First core (orange and white)
B
Second core (orange)
Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the CCU collector or ECC collector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.8 Connecting the Access Management System Cable 4.3.8.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the A8802RS or A8804RS Access Controller General Cable Connections to an Access Controller
When connecting the door access system, you need to connect a door access controller, an ECC500 collector, a door exit button, the fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad), card reader with w ith a keypad, single-door/double-door single-door/double-door magnetic ma gnetic lock, and emergency door release button.
Compared with the double-door access controller, the four-door access controller has one more set of CH1 and CH2 terminals on the left and a nd on the right respectively. The wiring method remains unchanged.
You can connect c onnect the fingerpr fingerprint int and card reader rea der (with a keypad), card car d reader with a keypad, and exit button to the CH1 or CH2 terminal on the left of the access acce ss controller in the following figure, and connect the double-door and single-door magnetic locks to the CH1 or CH2 terminal on the right of the access controller in the following figure.
The following figure uses the double-door access controller as an example to illustrate the wiring method for the access control system. In this example, the fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad) connects to the CH1 terminal on the left of the access controller, the card reader with a keypad connects to the CH2 terminal on the left of the access controller, the double-door magnetic lock connects connec ts to the CH1 ter terminal minal on the right of the access controller, and the single-door magnetic lock connects to the CH2 terminal on the right of the access controller.
Figure 4-46 General cable connections for the access control system
Connect the RS485 ports on the access controller and the fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad) respectively to any two of COM1 to COM3 ports on the ECC500 collector.
Fingerprint and card reader (with a keypad) refers to the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad or the fingerprint and card reader.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Connecting Cables to the Exit Button 4-47 shows the ca Figure 4-47 cable ble connections to the access controller and exit e xit button, using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable. Figure 4-47 Connecting cables to the exit button
Connecting Cables to the Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad The following figure shows the cable connections to the access acce ss controller and fing fingerpr erprint int and card reader with a keypad, using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable. Figure 4-48 Connecting cables to the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
Connect one end of the network cable to the female connector of the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad. Strip the other end of the network cable and connect it to the access controller terminal, as shown in the preceding prec eding figure. figure. If the network is non-standard, connect it by referring to the cable sequence in the following table.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-48 Cable connections for the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
Conversion Cable
Wire of the Network Cable
Access Controller Terminal
Red wire
Pin3
R-12V
Green wire
Pin4
R-D0
White wire
Pin5
R-D1
Black wire
Pin8
R-GND
Connect one end of another network cable to the RS485 port on the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, and connect the other end of the network cable to the non-energized COM port on the ECC500 collector. co llector. The follo following wing table shows the p in mapping for the RS485 port and the COM port.
Table 4-49 Pin mapping for the RS485 port and the COM port
RS485 Port on Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad
COM Port on ECC500 Collector
Pins
Definition
Pins
Pin1
485A (brown)
Pin1
Pin2
485B (white)
Pin2
Connecting Cables to the Card Reader with a Keypad The following figure shows the cable connections to the access controller and card reader with a keypad, using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable. Figure 4-49 Connecting cables to the card reader with a keypad
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Connecting Cables to the Single-Door Magnetic Lock, Double-Door Magnetic Lock, and Emergency Door Release Button
The double door electromagnetic lock is delivered with eight cables. Crimp the cables using cord end terminals ter minals as shown in in Figure 4-50, 4-50, crimp a cord end terminal at the terminal of the access controller.
4-50 shows the cable connections to the electromagnetic single-swing door lock Figure 4-50 and an emergency door release button, using the cord end terminal to crimp the cable. The cable installation sequences shown in the following figure are for reference only. If any differences exist between the wiring diagram and this figure, the wiring diagram prevails.
Figure 4-50 Connecting cables to the double-door magnetic lock and emergency door release button
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-51 Connecting cables to the single-door magnetic lock and emergency door release button butt on
Connecting Cables to the Double Door Interlock The double door interlock applies only to the four-door acce access ss controller.
Magnetic lock 1 is installed on door 1, and magnetic lock 2 is installed on door 2.
Card readers rea ders 1 and 2 are bound to the inside and outside of door 1. Card readers reader s 3 and 4 are bound to the in inside side and outside of door 2.
The CH2 and CH4 terminals on the right can be connected to the door status sensor. If the door status sensor is not connected, short-circuit the ST and GND terminals.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-52 Connecting cables to the double door interlock
Connecting the Power Cable to the Access Controller The access acce ss controller is powered by 220 V power supply supply. The power module is installed inside the access acc ess controller. controller. The access acce ss controller controller can c an obtain power from a power supply outside the equipment room. Strip the cable, install the connector (BOM number: 14170096), and connect the wires respectively to the L, N, and PE wiring terminals on the terminal block in the access acc ess 4-53.. Route the other end of the cable controller power module, as shown by (1) in in Figure 4-53 along the cable trough inside the access controller and then out of the cable outlet, and connect it to the power supply to receive power. Pay attention to the polarity when connecting cables.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-53 Connecting cables to the access controller
(1) Connecting the power cable for the access controller
(2) Connecting to the power supply, as 4-50 described in in Table 4-50
Table 4-50 Power cable connection for the access controller controller
Power Supply
Cable Connection
Power supply supply outside the equipment room
Install the connector (BOM number: 14170096) to the other end of the power cable and connect the power cable to a circuit breaker in the power supply outside the equipment room.
Related Information Table 4-51 Card reader and key terminal definition
Terminal Identity
Definition
BT
Key input input
R-AL
Card reader pry signal signal inpu inputt
R-BP
Control card reader buzzer
R-LED
Control card reader LED lights
R-D1
Card reader data 1
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Terminal Identity
Definition
R-D0
Card reader data 0
R-Gnd
Card reader public public ground
R-12V
Reader power + 12 V
Table 4-52 Lock and door magnetic terminal definition
Terminal Identity
Definition
LK+
Lock output power +
LK-
Lock output power -/Passiv -/Passivee output -
NP
Passive output +
LKS
Lock signal input +
ST
Door magnetic signal input +
Gnd
Common ground
Table 4-53 Alarm input terminal definition
Terminal Identity
Definition
AL(1-2)
Two-door controller, no power suppl supply y output signal
AL(1-4)
Four-door controller, no power suppl supply y output signal
Gnd
Common ground
Table 4-54 Power terminal definition
Terminal Identity LK-P
BAT
DC
AC
Definition +12V
Lock the power inpu inputt + 12 V
GND
Lock the power inpu inputt -
+
Battery +
-
Battery -
+12V
The controller + 12 V DC power DC inpu inputt
GND
Controller DC power input-
11V
The controller 11 V AC power inpu inputt
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-55 Indicator light definition
Terminal Identity
Definition
P
The controller power ligh light, t, red
RUN
Controller working indicator indicator light, white blue, flashing
LK(1-4)
Lock status indicator indicator light
Table 4-56 RS485 interface
Terminal Identity
Definition
AL3(A8802RS)/AL5(A8 804RS)
RS485-A
Gnd
RS485-B
Table 4-57 Access control system cable list
BOM Number
BOM Description
Cable Position
25030384
Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC 53(RVV), 3x1mm2, Black(3Cores: Brown, Blue, Yellow/Green), 10A, Outdoor Cable, CCC, CE
Access controller power cable
25030641
Electric Cable, 300V, UL2464, UL2464, 4x20AWG, Black(4Cores: Yellow, Green, Violet, White), 9A, Non-shielding Outdoor Cable, UL
Cable from the magnetic lock to the access controller
25030393
Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC 53(RVV), 2x0.75mm2, Black(2Cores: Brown, Blue), 6A, Flat Outdoor Cable, CCC, CE
Cable from the emergency door release button to the access controller
14180327
Terminal Block, 4-Pin, Screw Fix Fixed, ed, 24 – 1 12 2 AWG, Pitch 5.08 mm, Male and Female Using Together, Only for Power Supply
25031053
Electric Cable, 300V, UL2464, UL2464, 7x20AWG, Black(7Cores: Red, Black, Yellow, Green, Orange, White, Blue), 9A, Non-shielding Cable, UL
14180327
Terminal Block, 4-Pin, Screw Fix Fixed, ed, 24 – 1 12 2 AWG, Pitch 5.08 mm, Male and Female Using Together, Only for Power Supply
25030393
Electric Cable, 300V/500V, 60227 IEC 53(RVV), 2x0.75mm2, Black(2Cores:
Cable from the card reader to the access controller
Cable from the door exit button to the access controller
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
BOM Number
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
BOM Description
Cable Position
Brown, Blue), 6A, Flat Outdoor Cable, CCC, CE
4.3.8.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to the Shengjiu_MS899 Electronic Electronic Door Lock Prerequisites
A network cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC co llector ports.
Procedure Step 1 If connected to a CCU collector, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Cut off the crystal connector on the monitoring cable for the electronic door lock. 4-58 describes the core wires of the electronic door lock. Table 4-58
Table 4-58 Core wires of the electronic door lock
Color
Function
Red
Positive power terminal
Black
Negative power terminal
Blue
RS485+
Green
RS485-
Cut off the crystal connector from as near the connector as possible. 2.
Cut off one end of the network cable.
3.
Connect the core wires of the electronic door lock to the network core wires by sequence specified in in Table 4-59 4-59..
Table 4-59 Matches by core wire colors
Electronic Door Lock
Network cable
Red
Green and white
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Electronic Door Lock
Network cable
Black
Brown
Blue
Orange-white, and blue
Green
Orange, and blue-white blue-white
4.
Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the CCU collector.
Step 2 If connected to an ECC collector, connect the RJ45 connector of the electronic door lock cable to the COM port on the ECC collector. ----End
4.3.9 Connecting Monitoring Cables to a WCON-22Z WCON -22Z Skylight Ceiling Controller Prerequisites
A monitoring monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the collector c ollector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
Procedure Step 1 Connect the NO port of the ALM port on the skylight ceiling controller to Pin+ in the dry contact of the main control card in the collector, and connect port C to Pin- in the dry contact of the main control card. skylight ceili ce iling ng controller to the DO port on the EEU Step 2 Connect the MOTE OPEN port on the skylight connection tionss to the environment expansion card in the collector. collector. Figure 4-54 4-54 shows the cable connec skylight ceiling controller.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-54 Cable connections to the skylight ceiling controller
----End
4.3.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WCON-14Z Skylight Controller Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context 4-60 lists ports on the skylight controller. Table 4-60 Table 4-60 Ports on the skylight controller
Port
Function
Remarks
12 V+
Connects to a smoke sensor.
Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
G-
Connects to a smoke sensor.
Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
C
Connects to a smoke sensor.
Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
NO
Connects to a smoke sensor.
Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Port
Function
Remarks
REMOTE
Connects to the CCU or ECC, controlling the opening of the skylight.
If the REMOTE port is connected to DO port of ECC, you should specify the DO Settings as Manual in the ECC web page.
SOUND (12 V+ G-)
Connects to an audible and visual alarm.
The audible and visual alarm generates an alarm when the system is faulty. Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
1 (+ -) to 14 (+ -)
Connects to a skylight electromagnetic lock.
The electromagnet is powered on and the skylight is opened when 12 V power is normally supplied. Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
POWER ALM
Connects to a CCU or an ECC, the power alarm is reported over dry contacts.
Available when closed. Set the port on the CCU or ECC to report low level alarms over a dry contact.
SMG ALM
Connects to a CCU or an ECC, smoke sensor alarm is reported over dry contacts.
Available when closed. Set the port on the CCU or ECC to report low level alarms over a dry contact.
LINK IN
Connects to other associated skylight controllers, controlling the opening of the skylight.
Cascading port. This port connects to no cable by default. To connect connec t multipl multiplee skylight controllers to the fire extinguishing system in cascading mode, connect the LINK IN port to the LINK OUT port of next skylight controller. Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
LINK OUT
Connects to other associated skylight controllers, controlling the opening of the skylight.
Cascading port. This port connects to no cable by default. To connect connec t multipl multiplee skylight controllers to the fire extinguishing system in cascading mode, connect the LINK OUT port to the LINK IN port of next skylight controller. Configuration on the NetEco is not required.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4-61 describes the DIP switch on the skylight controller. Ensure that the two toggle Table 4-61 switches are both NO or NC. Table 4-61 Skylight controller DIP switch
Position
Function
Scenario Example
NO
The toggle switches are both For a skylight lock with a bolt, the 1 (+ – (+ – ) to 14 (+ – (+ – ) NO by default. Set both toggle switches to NO if you ports of the skylight controller do not supply need to open the skylight power to the bolt under after the skylight lock is normal conditions. After energized. you press the skylight skylight open button or start remote open, the 1 (+ – (+ – ) to 14 (+ – (+ – ) ports supply power to the bolt. Then the bolt draws in and the skylight opens.
NC
Set both toggle switches to NC if you need to open the skylight after the skylight lock is de-energized.
For a skylight electromagnetic lock, the 1 (+ (+ – – ) to 14 (+ – (+ – ) ports of the skylight controller supply power to the bolt under normal conditions. After you press the skylight skylight open button or start remote open, the 1 (+ – (+ – ) to 14 (+ – (+ – ) ports do not supply power to the electromagnetic lock. Then the magnetic force of the electromagnetic lock disappears and the skyligh skylightt opens.
The red switch button in the skylight controller fittings is a spare part. It connects to no cable by default. To op open en the window remotely (tailored scenario), conn connect ect the button to the MANUAL port of the skylight controller.
Procedure Step 1 Connect cables to the ports on the skylight controller, as shown in in Figure 4-55. 4-55.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-55 Cable connections for the skylight controller
4-62 shows how to connecting cables. Table 4-62 Table 4-62 Cable connections to the ports of the skylight controller
Port
Connection Method
12 V+
Connects to the positive pole (red) of the smoke sensor power source.
G-
Connects to the smoke sensor GND (black).
C
Connects to the common end (green) of the smoke sensor.
NO
Connects to the smoke sensor NO (blue).
REMOTE
Port REMOTE connects to the DO port on the CCU or the ECC.
SOUND (12 V+ G-)
The 12 V+ port and G- port respectively connect to the positiv positivee and negative poles of the audible and visual alarm.
1 (+ -) to 14 (+ -)
Ports + and - respectively connect to the positive and negative poles of the skylight electromagnetic lock.
POWER ALM
Connects to ports DI0 to DI4 on the CCU collector or AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
SMG ALM
Connects to ports DI0 to DI4 on the CCU collector or AI/DI port on the ECC collector.
LINK IN
Reserved port. It connects to no cable by default. To connect multiple skylight controllers to the fire extinguishi ext inguishing ng system in cascading mode (tailored scenario), connect the port to the LINK OUT port of next skylight controller.
LINK OUT
Reserved port. It connects to no cable by default. To connect multiple multiple skylight controllers to the fire extinguishing e xtinguishing system in cascading mode (tailored scenario), connect the port to the LINK IN port of next
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Port
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Connection Method skylight controller.
----End
4.3.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Lighting Control Box Prerequisites
A monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect cables to the ports on the lighting control box, as described desc ribed in in Table 4-63 4-63.. Table 4-63 Cable connections for the lighting control box
Port
Function
24 V DC OUTPUT
Connects to lamps in cabinets
C SW1, C SW2
Connects to lamp switches in corridors
C INFRA1~C INFRA4
Connects to the signal cable of the infrared sensor switch.
INFRA POWER
Connects to the power cable of the infrared sensor switch, with the distinction d istinction of L polarity and N polarity. The brown cable for the infrared sensor switch connects to L polarity and the blue one to N polarity.
LAMP OUTPUT
Connects to lights lights in corridors. The red cable for the lights in corridors connects to L polarity and the black one to N polarity.
----End
4.3.12 Connecting the Air Conditioner Monitoring Cable 4.3.12.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PEX Air Cond Conditioner itioner Prerequisites
A network cable is prepared for monitoring over the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Context
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared for monitoring over Modbus.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring referr ing to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
The NetEco can communicate with a PEX air conditioner over SNMP or Modbus. The two communication modes require different cable connections.
If they communicate over SNMP SNMP,, connect connec t the TCP/IP card in the PEX air a ir conditioner conditioner to the switch.
If they communicate over Modbus, connect the RS485 card in the PEX air conditioner to the collector.
Procedure Step 1 Determine the protocol type.
If they communicate over SNMP SNMP,, see see Step 2 2..
If they communicate over Modbus, see see Step 4. 4.
Step 2 In SNMP communication mode, connect one end of the network cable to the network port on the TCP/IP card, as shown in in Figure 4-56. 4-56. Figure 4-56 TCP/IP card in the PEX air conditioner
(1) Network port
Step 3 Connect the other end of the network cable to the Ethernet port on the switch. Step 4 In Modbus communication mode, connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 card car d in the PEX air conditioner, conditioner, aass shown in in Figure 4-57 4-57.. Table 4-64 4-64 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
a ir conditioner conditioner Figure 4-57 RS485 card in the PEX air
(1) RS485 port
Table 4-64 Mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal on the RS485 Card
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
ECC collector
-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
+
First core (Orange and white)
-
Second core (Orange)
Step 5 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port (RS485 protocol) on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a CRV Air Conditioner Conditioner Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC co llector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 card in the CRV air conditioner, as shown in in Figure 4-58 4-58.. Table 4-65 4-65 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-58 RS485 card in the CRV air conditioner
1. RS485 port
Table 4-65 Mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal on the RS485 Card
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
ECC collector
-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
+
First core (Orange and white)
-
Second core (Orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a DataMate3000 Da taMate3000 Air Conditioner (Method One) Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable required is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
This topic applies to the scenario in which the monitoring cable for the DataMate3000 connects to the top of it.
Context
When connecting the water DataMate3000 DataMate 3000 air conditioner conditioner to a CCU or an a n ECC, you need to perform the following steps to prepare a special spec ial mo monitoring nitoring cable.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure connected d by performing the following Step 1 If connected to a CCU, the monitoring cable should be connecte steps. 1.
Take two network cables A and B without connectors and connect their core wires based on the mappings described in in Table 4-66. 4-66.
Table 4-66 Connecting network cables
Network Cable A
Network Cable B
Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire 4 (blue)
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
Core wire 2 (orange), core wire 5 (blue-white)
Core wire 8 (brown)
2.
Prepare RJ45 connectors on one end of network cables c ables A and B by following to the instruction in in 4.3.1 Pre Preparing paring a Monitoring Cable. Cable.
3.
Connect the RJ45 connector of network cable A to the COM port on the CCU.
4.
Connect the RJ45 connector of network cable B to the port at the top of the 4-59.. DataMate3000 air condi c onditioner tioner shown in in Figure 4-59 Figure 4-59 RS485 port at the top of the DataMate3000 air conditioner
1. RS485 port on the DataMate3000 air conditioner
Step 2 If connected to an ECC, the monitoring cable should be connected by performing the following steps. 1.
Take two network cables A and B without connectors and connect their core wires based on the mappings described in in Table 4-67. 4-67.
Table 4-67 Connecting network cables
Network Cable A
Network Cable B
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Network Cable A
Network Cable B
Core wire 1 (orange-white)
Core wire 7 (brown-white)
Core wire 2 (orange)
Core wire 8 (brown)
2.
Prepare RJ45 connectors on one end of network cables c ables A and B by following to the Preparing paring a Monitoring Cable. Cable. instruction in in 4.3.1 Pre
3.
Connect the RJ45 connector of network cable A to the COM port on the CCU.
4.
Connect the RJ45 connector of network cable B to the port at the top of the DataMate3000 air condi c onditioner tioner shown in in Figure 4-59 4-59..
----End
4.3.12.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a DataMate3000 Da taMate3000 Air Conditioner (Method Two) Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context This topic applies to the scenario in which the monitoring cable for the DataMate3000 connects to its RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the DataMate3000 air conditioner, as shown in in Figure 4-60 4-60.. Table 4-68 4-68 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end e nd terminal terminal.. Figure 4-60 RS485 port on the DataMate3000 air conditioner
1.RS485+
2.RS485-
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-68 Mapping between the wiring terminals on the RS485 card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
ECC collector
-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
+
First core (Orange and white)
-
Second core (Orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to an a n AP0481H Air Condition Conditioner er Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar with the functions of all a ll ports on the CCU after referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Multiple AP0481H AP0481H air a ir conditioners share one controller, controller, and the air conditioners connect to collectors over port RS-485 on the controller.
Procedure Step 1 Open the cov c over er of the air conditioner controller, and a nd find out port RS-485 at the bottom of the controller.
Step 2 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to port RS-485 on the air conditioner controller. controller. Table 4-69 4-69 describes the cable connection. Table 4-69 Air conditioner cable connection
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
A
Orange-white and blue
B
Orange and blue-white
A
Orange-white
ECC
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Collector Type
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
B
Orange
Step 3 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a an n XR066C Air Cond Conditioner itioner Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to wiring terminal X1 in the RS485 port in the XR066C. XR066C. Table 4-70 4-70 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-70 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal X1 in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
ECC collector
Terminal 1 (A)
First core wire (orange-white)
Terminal 2 (B)
Second core wire (orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a NetCol5000-C025 Ne tCol5000-C025 Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU collector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
The wiring terminal on the NetCol5000-C025 for communicating with the NetEco is in the electric control box in the lower part of the NetCol5000-C025. Before connecting cables, take the electric control box out.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the 4-71 lists lists the mapp mapping ing between the wiring NetCol5000-C025, as shown in in Figure 4-61. 4-61. Table 4-71 terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal.
Figure 4-61 Wiring terminals of the NetCol5000-C025 communications cable
Table 4-71 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
+
First core (Orange and white)
-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.12.8 Connecting the NetCol5000-A042/A035/A020/C030 NetCol5000-A042/A035/A020/C030 Monitoring Cable Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the CCU collector ports.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure c ommunications cations port on the NetCol5000 side Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the communi panel.
Both the COM ports of NetCol5000-A042 and NetCol5000-A025 are on the main control modules at the air conditioner rear doors. The NetCol5000-A042 is used as an example to show the position of the main control module. Figure 4-62 NetCol50 NetCol5000-A0 00-A042 42 main main control control modul modulee
(1) Main control module
The position of the main control module in NetCol5000-A025 is the same as that in NetCol5000-A042.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-63 COM port on the main control module
(1) COM port
Open the air a ir conditioner conditioner rear re ar door, remove the filter, and connect the network cable to the COM port on the NetCol5000-A035. Figure 4-64 NetCol50 NetCol5000-A0 00-A035 35 COM COM port port
Open the air a ir conditioner conditioner rear re ar door, remove the filter, and connect the network cable to the communications port J73 on the main control module in NetCol5000-A020/NetCol5000-C030.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
NetCol5000-A0 00-A020/N 20/NetCol5 etCol5000 000-C030 -C030 communication communicationss p port ort JJ73 73 Figure 4-65 NetCol50
(1) J73 (teamwork bus port and host monitoring port)
The communications port is located on the main control board.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
The main control board can be Arm7 or M4. The appeara appearance nce var varies ies with the models delivered.
A DIP switch exists exists on the Arm7 main ma in control board, but does not eexist xist on the M4 ma main in control board. The DIP swit switch ch needs to be set for the Arm7 main control board, and does not need to be set for the M4 main control board.
You need to set se t only the seventh toggle switch based on teamwork requirements and leav lea ve other toggle switches in their default status.
Figure 4-66 DIP switches on the main control board
Table 4-72 Operations of the DIP switch
Dial Switch
Default Value
Operations
1
OFF
Remaining in OFF
2
OFF
Remaining in OFF
3
ON
Remaining in ON
4
ON
Remaining in ON
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Dial Switch
Default Value
Operations
5
OFF
Remaining in OFF
6
ON
Remaining in ON
7
OFF
8
ON
Not in teamwork mode: Remaining in OFF In teamwork mode: mode : Set toggle switch 7 on the main control boards of the first and a nd last air conditioners to ON, and a nd toggle toggle sw switch itch 7 on the main control boards of the other air conditioners to OFF.
Remaining in ON
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the CCU or ECC collector. ----End
4.3.12.9 Connecting the NetCol8000-A050/A100/C070/C150 NetCol8000-A050/A100/C070/C150 Monitoring Cable Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
You are familiar with functions of the CCU collector ports.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Open the NetCol N etCol8000 8000 front door to expose e xpose the main control board inside the electric control box.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-67 Main control board of the NetCol8000-A050
(1) The main control board
Figure 4-68 Main control board of the NetCol8000-A100
(1) The main control board
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-69 Main control board of the NetCol8000-C070
(1) The main control board
Figure 4-70 Main control board of the NetCol8000-C150
(1) The main control board
Step 2 Connect one end of a network cable to the teamwork communications port 1 or 2 on the NetCol8000 main control board.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
The main control board can be Arm7 or M4. The appeara appearance nce var varies ies with the model delivered.
A DIP switch exists exists on the Arm7 main ma in control board, but does not exist on the M4 main control board. The DIP swit switch ch needs to be set for the Arm7 main control board, and does not need to be set for the M4 main control board.
You need to set se t only the seventh toggle switch based on teamwork requirements and leave other toggle switches in their default status.
Figure 4-71 NetCol80 NetCol8000 00 main control control board board
(1) Teamwork communication 1
(2) Teamwork communication 2
(3) DIP switch of the main control board
Table 4-73 Operations of the DIP switch
Dial Switch
Default Value
Operations
1
OFF
Remaining in OFF
2
OFF
Remaining in OFF
3
ON
Remaining in ON
4
ON
Remaining in ON
5
OFF
Remaining in OFF
6
ON
Remaining in ON
7
OFF
Not in teamwork mode: Remaining in OFF
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Dial Switch
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Default Value
Operations
8
ON
In teamwork mode: mode : Set toggle switch 7 on the main control boards of the first and a nd last air conditioners to ON, and a nd toggle toggle sw switch itch 7 on the main control boards of the other air conditioners to OFF.
Remaining in ON
Step 3 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the CCU or ECC collector. ----End
4.3.12.10 Connecting the NetCol8000-A030U/A040D/A060D/C030U/C150U Monitoring Cable Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the CCU collector ports.
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord-end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port (labeled SIP7_RS485_Socket) on the NetCol8000 NetCol8000 main control board. Figure 4-72 Wiring terminals of the NetCol8000 communications cable
Table 4-74 Connecting NetCol8000 cables
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
TX+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Type of the Collector Connected
ECC collector
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Cord End Terminal
TX-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
TX+
First core (Orange and white)
TX-
Second core (Orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.13 Connecting the UPS Monitoring Cable 4.3.13.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a HIPULSE U UPS Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring referr ing to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context There are three slots in the monitoring board of the HIPULSE U UPS to house a Modbus card: Intellislot 1, Intellislot2, and Intellislot Inte llislot 3. Y You ou can insert a Modbus card into any of the thre threee slots.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the RS485 port on the Modbus card. Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable ca ble to the COM port on the CCU collector or ECC collector. ----End
4.3.13.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a Delta De lta 120 kVA UPS Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU collector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the Modbus card in the Delta 120 kVA UPS. UPS. Table 4-75 4-75 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals on the Modbus card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal.
Table 4-75 Mapping between the wiring terminals on the Modbus card and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal on the Modbus Card
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
1
First core (Orange (Ora nge and white), fourth core (blue)
2
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
1
First core (Orange and white)
2
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the CCU collector or ECC collector. ----End
4.3.13.3 Connecting the UPS2000-G Monitoring Cable (MODBU (MODBUS) S) Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM_1 or COM_2 port on the Modbus expansion card of the UPS2000-G.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-73 RS485 port
(1) COM1 port (RS485 supported)
(2) COM2 port (RS485 supported)
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC500 collector. ----End
4.3.14 Connecting the Electricity Meter Monitoring Monitoring Cable 4.3.14.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a YD2010 Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context This section uses the YD2010 coulometer as an example to illustrate how to connect a monitoring cable. The cable connection method in this section applies to coulometers of the following models:
2X72X
YD2010
YD2202
YD49HMI
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
YD52HMI
YDAPM-HM
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Before the power distribution distribution cabinet (PD U8000) configured with the YD2010 ccoulometer oulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the YD2010 coulometer. You You only need to cconnect onnect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 where the YD2010 coulometer is installed. installed. Table 4-76 4-76 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-76 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.14.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PD800 Coulometer Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Context
Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the PD800 coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the PD800 coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
During onsite operations, obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring wir ing terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
This topic describes how to connect c onnect a monitoring cable to the PD800 coulometer in a 380 V UPS output PDU8000.
Procedure Step 1 View the PD U8000 conceptual diagram and find that the RS485+ port on the wiring terminal block is numbered 7 and the RS485 port is numbered 8, as shown in in Figure 4-74 4-74..
Step 2 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-77 PDU8000. 4-77 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Figure 4-74 Wiring terminal on the PD800 coulometer
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-77 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
7
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
8
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
7
First core (orange and white)
8
Second core (orange)
ECC collector
Step 3 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.14.3 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PD510 Coulometer Coulometer Connecting monitoring cable to PD510 is the same as PD800, for details, see see 4.3.14.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PD800 Coulometer .
4.3.14.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a DIRISA20 Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector por ts.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the DIRISA20 coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the DIRISA20 coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-78 PDU8000. 4-78 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-78 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.14.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PM710 and PM750 Coulometer Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC co llector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the coulometer. Table 4-79 coulometer. 4-79 describes the cable connection. Table 4-79 Coulometer cable connection
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
+
Orange-white and blue
–
Orange and blue-white
+
Orange-white
–
Orange
ECC
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.14.6 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to an a n ABB Coulo Coulometer meter Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution distribution cabinet (PD U8000) configured with the ABB coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the ABB coulometer. You You only need to connect the moni monitoring toring cab cable le to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-80 PDU8000. 4-80 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-80 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
c ollector. ector. Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the coll ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.7 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PZ80L-E4KC PZ80L -E4KC Coulometer Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear rea r of the PZ80L-E4KC cou lometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-81 PDU8000. 4-81 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-81 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the coll c ollector. ector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.8 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a KeluMeter Kel uMeter Cou Coulometer lometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the KeluMeter coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the KeluMeter coulo c oulometer. meter. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-82 PDU8000. 4-82 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-82 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.9 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a PMAC625 and PMAC720 Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear r ear of the P PMAC625 MAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-83 PDU8000. 4-83 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-83 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
ECC collector
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.10 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PD194Z Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the PD194Z coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the PD194Z coulometer. You only only need to connect the moni monitoring toring ca cable ble to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-84 PDU8000. 4-84 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-84 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the coll c ollector. ector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.11 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a SepamT20 Coulometer Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the SepamT20 coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the SepamT20 coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-85 PDU8000. 4-85 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-85 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.12 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the IG-NT IG- NT Coulo Coulometer meter Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the IG-NT coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the IG-NT coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-86 PDU8000. 4-86 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-86 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.14.13 Connecting a Monitoring Cable Cable to a PM5350 Coulo Coulometer meter Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the PM5350 coulometer is delivered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the PM5350 coulometer. You You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the coulometer and the other end of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-87 PDU8000. 4-87 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-87 Mapping between the wiring terminals and the colors of core wires
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (Orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (Orange), fifth core (blue and white)
RS485+
First core (Orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (Orange)
ECC collector
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.15 Connecting the PDC Monitoring Cable 4.3.15.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to an a n ABB OTM ATS Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description Desc ription for for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context The cable c able connection method described in this section applies to ATSs ATSs o f the following models:
ABB_OTM_C8DV2
ABB_OTM32E4C8D220C
ABB_OTM400E4C8D220C
ABB_OTM630E4C8D220C
ABB_OTM125E4C8D220C
Before the power distribution distribution cabinet (PDC) (PD C) configured with the ABB OTM ATS ATS is deliv de livered, ered, the wiring terminal block in the PDC has been connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the ABB OTM ATS. ATS. You You only need to connect the monitoring monitoring ccable able to the wiring terminal block in the PDC. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram. Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the A ATS TS and the ccable able connected to the port. The port to which the other end of the cable is connected is the RS485 port on the wirin wiring g terminal block.
Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the ABB OTM AC transfer switch (ATS) (ATS) is deliv de livered, ered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the ABB OTM ATS. You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block b lock in the PDU8 PD U8000. 000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
During onsite operations, obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring wir ing terminal block from the conceptual diagram. Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the ATS ATS and the other end of the cable. ca ble. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the 4-88 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and PDU8000. Table 4-88 PDU8000. the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Table 4-88 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
RS485+
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
RS485-
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
ECC collector
RS485+
First core (orange and white)
RS485-
Second core (orange)
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.15.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to a TU520A ATS Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar with the functions of all a ll ports on the CCU collector by referring r eferring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context Before the power distribution cabinet (PDU8000) configured with the TU520A AC transfer switch (ATS) (ATS) is deliv de livered, ered, the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000 has connected to the RS485 port on the rear of the TU520A ATS. You only need to connect the monitoring cable to the wiring terminal block in the PDU8000. Locate the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block by using either of the following methods:
Obtain the number of the RS485 port on the wiring terminal block from the conceptual diagram.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Locate the RS485 port on the rear of the A ATS TS and the other end e nd of the cable. The port to which the other end connects is the RS485 port.
This topic describes descr ibes how to connect connec t a monitoring monitoring cab le to the TU T U520A ATS in a 380 V UPS output PDU8000.
Procedure Step 1 View the PDU8000 conceptual diagram and find that port A for the ATS on the wiring terminal block is numbered numbere d 16 and port B is numbered 17, as shown in in Figure 4-75 4-75..
Step 2 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port in the PDU8000. Table 4-89 PDU8000. 4-89 lists the mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal. Figure 4-75 Wiring terminal termina l on the TU520A T U520A ATS
Table 4-89 Mapping between the wiring terminals in the RS485 port and the colors of core wires in the cord end terminal
Type of the Collector Connected
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU collector
16
First core (orange and white), fourth core (blue)
17
Second core (orange), fi fifth fth core (blue and white)
16
First core (orange and white)
17
Second core (orange)
ECC collector
Step 3 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector.
End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
4.3.15.3 Connecting the PDU8000 Monitoring Cable Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM port in the display panel of PDU8000. Figure 4-76 Connecti Connecting ng the PDU800 PD U8000 0 monitoring cable (COM port)
(1) COM port
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port of the ECC collector. ----End
4.3.15.4 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to the Monitoring Type-PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1 Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable to the COM1 port or the COM2 port on the PDU2000.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-77 PDU2000 ports
Step 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the ECC500 collector. PD U2000s 000s need to be cascaded, ca scaded, connect the COM1 port of one Step 3 (Optional) If multiple PDU2 PDU2000 to the COM2 port on the next PDU2000.
A maximum of four PDU2000s can be cascaded.
----End
4.3.15.5 Connecting a Monitoring Cabl Cable e to an an HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1 Prerequisites A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the monitoring cable. 1.
Connect one end of the network cable to port COM1 or COM2 on the PDU PD U2000. 2000. Figure 4-78 shows the ports on the PDU2000. 4-78
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Figure 4-78 PDU2000 ports
2.
Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port of the ECC collector.
ca ble to connect port Step 2 (Optional) Connect PDU2000 cascading cables. Use a common network cable COM1 or COM2 on the PDU2000 to port COM1 or COM2 on another PDU2000.
A maximum maximum of four P PDU DU2000s 2000s can be ca cascaded. scaded.
If PDU2000s are cascaded, you need to connect only one PDU2000 to the collector.
----End
4.3.16 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a Battery Monitoring Unit Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring re ferring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the battery
monitoring unit. unit. Table 4-90 4-90 describes the cable connection.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Table 4-90 Cable connection for the battery monitoring unit
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
A
Orange-white and blue
B
Orange and blue-white
A
Orange-white
B
Orange
ECC
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.17 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehumidifier Prerequisites
A network cable used for monitoring is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Context A conversion conversion adapter delivered with the dehumidifier is required for connecting the dehumidifier to the collector.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the delivered conversion adapter to port DB9 on the rear of the dehumidifier. Step 2 Connect one end of the network cable to the conversion adapter. Step 3 Connect the other end of the network cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.18 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the DG Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Context The DG connects to the collector over the RS485 port on the DG controller. The RS485 port on the DG controller includes ports 65 and 66.
Procedure Step 1 Open the door of the DG controller. Step 2 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the DG D G. Table 4-91 4-91 describes the cable connection. Table 4-91 DG cable connection
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal of the DG Controller
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
65
Orange-white and blue
66
Orange and blue-white
65
Orange-white
66
Orange
ECC
Step 3 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.19 Connecting a Monitoring Monitoring Cable to a Sepam Series 10 VCB Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring to to 4.3.2 Port
Description for CCU Collector . You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the VCB. Table 4-92 4-92 describes the cable connection. Table 4-92 VCB cable connection
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
3
Orange-white and blue
4
Orange and blue-white
3
Orange-white
ECC
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Collector Type
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
4
Orange
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.20 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to an AVR Prerequisites
An RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU after referring to to 4.3.2 Port Description for CCU Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the cord end terminal of the RS485 monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the AVR. Table 4-93 4-93 describes the cable connection. Table 4-93 AVR cable connection
Collector Type
Wiring Terminal in the RS485 Port
Color of Core Wire in the Cord End Terminal
CCU
A+
Orange-white and blue
B –
Orange and blue-white
A+
Orange-white
B –
Orange
ECC
Step 2 Connect the RJ45 connector of the RS485 monitoring cable to the COM port on the collector. ----End
4.3.21 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a CIM01C1 Prerequisites
The RS485 monitoring cable is prepared.
You are familiar familiar w ith the functions of all ports on the CCU co llector by referring to to 4.3.2 Port Descriptio Desc ription n for CCU CC U Collector .
You are familiar familiar w ith functions of the ECC collector ports.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
4 Connecting Monitoring Cables to Devices
Procedure Step 1 Scenario where the CIM is connected to the collector. 1.
Connect one end of the network cable to the COM_IN port on the CIM module.
2.
Connect the other end e nd of the network cable to the COM port with 12 V power suppl supply y on
the collector. Step 2 Scenario where the CIM is connected to the UPS. 1.
Connect the COM_OUT port on the CIM to the COM2 port on the UPS.
The UPS2000 does not support direct connection to the CIM.
Step 3 (Optional) If multiple CIM modules need to be cascaded, connect the COM_IN port on one CIM module to the COM_OUT port on another CIM module. ----End
4.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800 Collector 4.4.1 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the ECC800 Collector Procedure the Intelligent Step 1 For details about how to connect monitoring cables to the ECC800, see the Intelligent Micro-Module Management M anagement System Wiring Wiring Diagram Diagram,, visit http://e.huawei.com/ , search for Smart Modular Data Center Quick Reference Guide and download it. The onsite wiring diagram of the management system prevails. The method described in this section is for reference only.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commi Commissioning ssioning Guide
5
5 Checking the Installation
Checking the Installation
5.1 Checking the Installation of the Cabinet SN
Check Item
1
The cabinet is placed as designed.
2
The rack is secure and reliable and meets the anti-seismic requirements. The horizontal and vertical differences do not exceed 3 mm. You can use a horizontal ruler and a lead ruler to measure the differences.
3
If the cabinet is placed on an ESD floor, all the expansion bolts of the supports are secure with the floor; the installation sequence of the insulation washers, flat washers, spring washers, and nuts (bolts) are correct; the installation holes of the supports are secure with the expansion bolts. The supports are insulated from the floor and guide rails. The resistance of all the insulated points between the supports and cabinets measured by the MΩ level of the multimeter is greater than 5 MΩ.
4
All the screws are secure; a flat washer and a spring washer are installed installed for each screw; the washers are properly placed.
5
The cabinets are arranged in order. The cabinet queue at both sides of the passage are straight, and the difference does not exceed 5 mm.
6
The connecting plates are installed installed properly when two cabinets are deployed on one site.
7
The front, side, and rear doors of the cabinets are inst installed. alled. The front and rear doors can be opened and closed. The door locks function normally.
8
The exteriors and inter interiors iors of the cabinets (including the front door, rear door, and sides of each cabinet) are clean. No dirt, damage, or fingerprint is allowed.
9
All the outlets or inlets of the cabinets are sealed. The gap around a cover plate does not exceed exce ed the width of the cover plate. p late. If a bag is used, the opening of the bag is tied up. The sizes of the outlets that use plastics are appropriate. You can ca n use other appropriate, insulated, or flame-resistant materials to seal the outlets.
10
There are excessive hair bands, lines, and other wastes.
11
All the configured filler panels are install installed. ed.
12
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
The ESD wrist strap is inserted into the ESD installation hole.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commi Commissioning ssioning Guide
SN 13
5 Checking the Installation
Check Item The cabinet labels are smooth and tidy. tidy.
5.2 Checking the Installation of Component Componentss in the Cabinet SN
Check Item
1
The devices devices are installed installed in the correct positions positions as designed.
2
All the panel screws of the devices devices are inst installed alled and secure.
3
The panel and exterior of each device device are not dirty, and the paint is not scraped off.
4
The labels (coating of the subrack, plate nameplate, transport label, label, and product nameplate) of each device are not peeled off.
5
The bar code of each device device is not peeled off.
6
The ejector lev lever er of each board is placed in position.
7
The captive captive screws of each board are secure.
8
There is no vacant slot in the subrack, and filler filler panels are installed installed in vacant slots.
9
A protective cover is installed for the power module if the power modul modulee is configured with a protective cover.
5.3 Checking the Installation of Power Cables and Ground Cables SN
Check Item
1
All the power cables and ground cables are copper-core cables.
2
There are no solder joints or connectors in power cables and ground cables.
3
The extra length of power cables or ground cables is truncated and the cables are not coiled.
4
There are no breaking equipment such as switches and fuses in the electrical electrica l connection of the grounding system.
5
The ground bars and PGND bars are connected to one grounding conductor.
6
The OT terminals at both ends of the power cables or ground cables are crimped securely.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commi Commissioning ssioning Guide
5 Checking the Installation
SN
Check Item
7
The bare wires and OT terminals terminals at the wiring terminals are tightly tightly wrapped up with PVC insulation tapes or heat shrink tubing.
8
The power cables and ground cables connecting the PDB with each devi device, ce, and the ground cables connecting each device device w ith the PGND busbar of the ccabinet abinet are all a ll correctly installed and have good contact.
9
The power cables and ground cables are bound separately from other cables.
10
Labels are attached at both ends of the power cables and ground cables.
11
The plastic plastic cover plate on the top of wiring terminals of the PDB is properly installed.
5.4 Checking the Connection of Signal Cables SN
Check Item
1
There are no solder joints or connectors in signal cables. The signal cables are not scratched or broken.
2
The connectors of signal signal cables are tigh tightt and secure.
3
Proper length length of the cable is reser reserv ved at the connectors.
4
Proper length length is reser ved for signal cables at turning points. The turning radius meets the requirement.
5
The optica opticall fibers must be sheathed using corrugated pipes at outsides of cabinets. Both ends of the pipes must be fastened. The edges are smooth or be processed for cutting prevention.
6
No other cables are lai laid d on optical fibers.
7
The extra optica opticall cables are coiled on the cable coiler at the rear of the cabinet.
8
The signal signal cables connected to the left part of the subrack are led out of the subrack from the left. Similarly, the signal cables connected to the right part of the subrack are led out of the subrack from the right.
9
The signal signal cables are bound separately from the power cables. The sign signal al cables are bound and arranged neatly and closely. The cable ties are spaced evenly. The tips of the cable ties point to the same direction.
10
The extra length of the cable ties must be cut and the cut surface must be smooth.
11
The cables whose connectors are far away from the cable entrance are arranged at the external side of the cable bundle, while those near the entrance are arranged at the internal side of the cable bundle. The trunk cables are laid out smoothly without any tangling.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6
Adding Devices
The corresponding software version is NetEco V600R007C90SPC330. Table 6-1 Encryption algorithms
Insecure Encryption Algorithm
Secure Encryption Algorithm
DES/3DES (excluding the scenario in which K1≠K2≠K3 is used) used)
SKIPJACK
RC2
RSA (1024 bits or less)
MD2/MD4
MD5 needs to be used in the scenarios where digital signatures are generated or passwords are encrypted before saving.
SHA1 needs to be used in the scenario where digital signatures are generated.
Symmetric encryption algorithm: AES (128 bits or more)
Asymmetrical encryption algorithm: RSA (2048 bits or more)
Hash algorithm: SHA2 (256 bits or more)
Hashed message authentication code (HMAC): HMAC-SHA2
Table 6-2 Communication Communicationss protocols
Insecure Communications Protocol
Secure Communications Protocol
SNMP V1/V2
SNMP V3
IPMI 1.5
IPMI 2.0
SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0
TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Devices may ha ve insecure alg algorithms orithms and protocols. pr otocols. A risk may occur w when hen you use these algorithms and protoco ls. You You are advi advised sed to replace r eplace these devi devices ces w ith those supporting secure algorithms and protocols or upgrade these devices to a version supporting secure algorithms and protocols.
6.1 Basic Operations Before Adding Devices 6.1.1 Creating a Domain This section describes how to configure managed domains.
Prerequisites You have logged in to the NetEco Ne tEco client by web browser You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
Context The types of the managed domain: Park, Building, Room, Container, Subnet, NetecoSite. You You are advised to plan the affiliation before configuring the managed domains. To create management domain, note that:
You can create Park , Building , Building-ShapeNode, ContainerDC, Room, Room-ShapeNode, Subnet , NetecoSite, FusionModule500 and Site under Root.
You can create Building, Building-ShapeNode , ContainerDC, Room, and Room-ShapeNode under Park .
You can create only Floor-ShapeNode under Building.
You can create Device, Cooling, Oil Machine, Power, Monitor, AIO, Union, and
Transformer under ContainerDC . You can create Park , NetecoSite, FusionModule500, Modular, and Site under Subnet.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Add managed domains. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose the father node where you want to add a managed domain.
2.
In the Domain area which is below the na vigation vigation tree, tree , drag a mana managed ged domain icon to the required position in the view. You can adjust the shape of room, Room-ShapeNode, Building-ShapeNode, Floor-ShapeNode, Container-ShapeNode, background planning NetEco site, and domains and devices created at the background backgr ound plan planning ning N NetE etEco co site: H Holding olding d down own the Shift key and the left mouse button and then clicking on the corresponding lines can increase the small yellow dot. You can drag the small yellow dot
to adjust the shape of the managed domain icon.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
To delete a domain, click the domain icon and select Delete under
3.
.
In the right side of the view area, set Management Info. You can configure Management Info, Electricity Info, and Refrigeration Info for the equipment room management domain.
Table 6-3 6-3 lists the for Park , Building , ContainerDC , and 6-3 and and Table 6-4 6-4 parameters list the configuration parameters for Room and Subnet . Table 6-3 configuration NetecoSite . Table 6-3 Management domain parameter list 1
Item
Description
Configuration Requirements
Management Info
Parent Object
Name of the upper-level upper -level management domain
Identified by the system.
Type
Type of the created management domain
Identified by the system.
Name
Name of the created crea ted management domain
1 – 128 128 characters.
SN
No. of the created management domain
Range: 0-128 characters
Description
Physical location of the created management domain
Range: 0-64 characters
Plan Power (kW)
Total power designed for the created management domain
Range: floating point number of 1-10000000 (accurate to three decimal places)
Description
Description about the created management domain
Range: 0-255 characters
Longitude
Longitude of the position where the created management domain is located
Range: – Range: – 180° 180° to +180°
NOTE After this parameter is configured,
You ccan an view the GIS map corresponding to the management domain on the Data Center View page.
When this parameter is configured for two or more management domains, you can query the management domain information on
the map on the Asset
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Item
Description
6 Adding Devices
Configuration Requirements
Overview page.
Latitude
Latitude of the position where the created management domain is located
Range: – Range: – 90° 90° to +90°
NOTE After this parameter is configured,
You ccan an view the GIS map corresponding to the management domain on the Data Center View page.
When this parameter is configured for two or more management domains, you can query the management domain information on the map on the Asset Overview page.
Table 6-4 Management domain parameter list 2
Item
Description
Configuration Requirements
Management Info
Room Type
The equipment room types include the generator room, high-voltage power distribution room, low-voltage power
Select an equipment room type as required.
distribution room, power transformation and distribution room, power battery room, servi ser vice ce room, and cooling room. Design Type
The design type of the branch can be floor layout or base map layout.
Select a branch design type as required.
Planned Rack Position
Number of planned rack places for the created crea ted management domain. The number of racks in the equipment room cannot
Range: integer from 1 to 2000
exceed the planned number of rack places.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Item
Description
Configuration Requirements
Wire Laying
Cabling mode of the created management domain
Select Upline or Downline from the drop-down list box.
Address
Location of the created management domain
Range: 0-128 characters
City
Name of the city where the created management domain is located
Range: 0-128 characters
Country
Name of the country where the created management domain is located
Range: 0-64 characters
Level
Level of the created management domain
Select Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, A, B , or C from the drop-down list box.
Owner
Owner of the created management domain
Range: 0-64 characters
Electricity Info
City Power Supply Mode
Power supply supply mode of the created management domain
Select Single power supply or Dual power supply from the drop-down list box.
Voltage Type(VAC)
Voltage mode of the created management domain
Select 110V, 220V, or 380V from the drop-down list box.
UPS Working Mode
UPS working mode of the created management domain
Select N, N+X(X=1 – N N)), 2N, or 2(N+1) from the drop-down list box.
Has Generator
Generator for the created management domain
Select NULL, Single Generator, or Dua Generator from the drop-down list box.
Frequency
Mains frequency of the created management domain
Select 50HZ or 60HZ from the drop-down list box.
Refrigeration Info
Cooling Model
Cooling mode of the created management domain
Select Water Cooled Direct Expansion, Air Cooled Direct Expansion , or Chilled-water refrigeration from the drop-down drop- down list box.
Air-Distribu tion
Air supply mode of the created management domain
Select Vertical under-floor Air-distribution or Horizontal displacement Air-distribution from the drop-down list box.
Plan
Cooling power of the
Range: floating point number of 1-10000000
Refrigeratin g
created domain management
(accurate to three decimal places)
Capacity(k
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Item
Description
6 Adding Devices
Configuration Requirements
W)
The parameters with * must be set. Other parameters are optional. The value of Planned Rack Position cannot be changed after it is set. The number of racks cannot exceed the planned number of rack places. Therefore, the planned number of rack places should be set to a value great enough to meet the requirements for rack view creation.
4.
Click
on the toolbar. toolbar.
Repeat steps steps Step 2.1 2.1 to to Step 2.4 2.4 until the configuration is complete.
Step 3 Click
on the toolbar. toolbar.
----End
6.1.2 Adding a Module You can create c reate a modular in the equipment room, branch, root node, union box, box, or subnet management domain.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
You have created cre ated an equipment room or NetEco Ne tEco site in Data Center Planning. For detailed operations, see Creating a Domain. Domain.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Choose the management domain from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Click Domain . The infrastructure area is displayed. Step 4 Select Modular from the Type drop-down list, as shown in in Figure 6-1. 6-1. Figure 6-1 Selecting the modular
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
dr ag the modular icon to the Room are area, a, as shown in Step 5 Select the Modular to be added and drag Figure 6-2 6-2.. Figure 6-2 Adding the modular in the room area
6-5 or retain the default values, and Step 6 Modify Management Info of the module based on on Table 6-5 then click
6-2.. , as shown in in Figure 6-2
The parameters with * are mandatory.
Table 6-5 Setting modular parameters
Name
Description
Required list
Name
Name of the device.
Direction
Set to Horizontal by default. Chooses in the dropdown box Horizontal or Vertical.
Layout
Set to single-row wide aisle1 by default. aisle1 Chooses behind in the dropdown the single-row , single-row wide aisle2 , dual-row wide ai wide aisle slebox , single-row narrowwide aisle1 , single-row narrow aisle2 and single-row dual aisle.
Half-Size Cabinet
Set to 11 by default.
Aisle Size
Set to 1200 by default.
Aisle Containm ent Type
Set to Cool Aisle by default
The value is an integer ranging from 4 to 50.
The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 65535.
Chooses in the dropdown box Hot Aisle or Cool Aisle.
Optional list
Parent Object
Management domain of the device. The NetEco automatically identifies this name.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Name
Description
Type
Device type.
6 Adding Devices
The NetEco automatically identifies this name. Manufact urer
Manufacturer of the device.
Serial Number
Device number.
Location
Location of the device.
The value contains 1 to 64 characters.
The value contains 0 to 64 characters.
The value contains 0 to 64 characters. Install Mode
Set to Floor Build In by default. Installation mode of the devi de vice, ce, including including Floor Build In, Cabinet Build In, Wall Build In and Ceiling Installation.
Wire Type
Set to Ascending Line by default.
Airflow Type
Set to Vertical Under-Floor Air-Distribution by default.
Height
Set to 2000 by default.
Wiring mode of the device, including Ascending Line, Dow Down n Line Lin e and Floor Line.
A total of five airflow types, such as the Vertical Under-Floor Air-Distribution , Horizontal Displacement Air-Distribution and Side Displacement Air-Distribution.
Chooses the 2000 number or the 2200 number in the dropdown box.
Layout, Aisle Size, and Aisle Containment Type of a modular cannot be modified after
being saved. ----End
Follow-up Procedure You can delete de lete one modular or multiple modulars in batches on the current cur rent page. If a modular contains sub d devices, evices, you cannot delete th thee modular. You can delete the modular only after you delete sub devices in the modular.
Delete one module. a.
Select Modular and click Delete under
, as shown in in Figure 6-3 6-3..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-3 Deleting one module page
b.
In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
Delete multiple modules in batches. a.
Click
on the toolbar to display the the Figure 6-4 6-4 page. page.
Figure 6-4 Deleting multiple modules in batches page
b.
Select multiples and click Delete .
c.
In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK .
6 Adding Devices
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.2 Setting SMS This section describes how to set the interworking parameters of the SMS modem on the NetEco. This ensures that the NetEco can communicate with the SMS modem proper ly and the modem sends short messages to users properly.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
An SMS modem has been installed and commissioned.
You have obtained the interworking interwor king parameters, such as the phone number for receiving re ceiving the notification, of the SMS modem from users.
You have the operation rights for Set Notified Server.
Context
The SMS modem is not supported in cloud deployment scenarios.
You need to input calling number and Email for sending remote alarm notification. Therefore, you are obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the countries concerned and the user protected protected. . privacy policies of your company, to ensure that the personal data of users is fully
Personal data such as phone numbers and Email addresses are anonymized in the NetEco GUI and encrypted in the NetEco during batch data transmission to ensure data security.
Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Settings > Set Notified Server from the main menu. The Set Notified Server window is displayed.
Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left, choose SMS Modem. Step 3 Set interworking parameters of the SMS modem. For details, see Fig Figure ure 6-5 6- 5. Figure 6-5 Setting interworking parameters of the SMS modem
Table 6-6 Parameters of the SMS modem
Parameter
Description
Network system of SMS modem
RAT of the SMS modem, for example, GSM and CDMA.
Serial port for
Serial port for connecting the SMS modem on the server, for
connecting SMS
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
example, COM1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description
modem SMS modem bound rate
SMS modem bound rate provided in the SMS modem user manual.
Mobile number for receiving notification
Phone number to which the short messages are sent.
115200, 9600 or 4800.
NOTE Mobile number for receiving notification must be set according to the following requirements:
1. A country code must be added preceding the calling number. For example, if the subscriber is located in China, the entered calling number is in the following format: 86 + Calling number. 2. If short messages are successfully sent but the subscriber does not receive the short messages, you need to remove the country code.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Test to check the connection between the NetEco and the SMS modem. Click Reset to reset interworking parameters of the SMS modem.
----End
6.3 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC500 Collector and LAN Switch 6.3.1 Commissioning a CCU Collector Collector This topic describes how to commission a CCU collector. The NetEco monitors running status of CCU collectors for each module through Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Before connecting a CCU collector to the element management system (EMS), locally configure its IP address and subnet mask. Then, configure CCU collector information on the Web platform to establish communication between the CCU collector and the NetEco. Uniflair air conditioners connect only to the Uart expand unit (UEU) sub control card.
6.3.1.1 Configuring CCU Collector Scenarios Operation Scenario A CCU collector is configured with w ith the wireless scenario by default. Y You ou must set the CCU collector scenario to the serv ser ver scenario scena rio before connecting the CCU collector the EMS.
Prerequisites
The hardware is installed.
The IP address for the CCU collector is obtained (the def default ault IP address for the CCU collector is 192.168.1.100).
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
A PC with an IP address which is in the same network segment with that of the CCU collector connects to the CCU collector over a switch.
You have obtained CfgTool.exe at at http://e.huawei.com http://e.huawei.com and decompressed it to the PC. You can navigate to Search for software in Software and use the package name as the keyword to quickly locate a tool package.
The default IP address a ddress for the CCU collector collector is 192.168.1.100. You You can only config configure ure one CCU collector once time when there are more than one CCU collectors to be configured. Connect one CCU collector to a PC over a switch in operation, configure one CCU collector as following operations and devide into several times to complete the configuration of all CCU collectors.
Operation Procedure 1.
Enable the CCU configuration tool on the PC. The PC IP address must be in the same network segment as the CCU collector IP address.
2.
Select the PC IP address from the Local IP drop-down list. 6-6 uses 192.168.1.45 as an The start and a nd end IP addresses are displayed. displayed. Figure 6-6 example. Figure 6-6 Start and end IP addresses
3.
Click Find. The IP addresses of all CCU collectors that are in the same network segment with that of the PC IP address are ar e displ displayed ayed under CCU, as shown in in Figure 6-7 6-7..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-7 Querying CCU collector information
4.
Click the IP address of the CCU collector to be configured and click Settings , as shown in in Figure 6-8 6-8.. Figure 6-8 Select a CCU collector
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
5.
6 Adding Devices
Choose Comhub from the Scene drop down list. Figure 6-9 Selecting the CCU collector scenario
6.
Click Config next to Scene.
7.
Are you sure to change ccu scene is displayed. Click Yes.
8.
Set device [192.168.1.100] scene comhub success is displayed. Click OK .
9.
Stop the CCU configuration tool.
6.3.1.2 Configuring a CCU Collector This topic describes how to configure c onfigure a CCU collector locally. locally. Before connecting a CCU collector to the NetEco, configure a subnet mask, a default de fault gateway, and an IP addr address ess for the connector.
Operation Scenario Configure an IP address and a visiting route for a CCU collector on the web user interface (WebUI) (W ebUI) after the hardware is iinstalled. nstalled. To ensure the security of data transmission, transm ission, the transmits data after encrpting it over SSL.
Prerequisites Prerequisites
The hardware is installed.
The CCU collector is connected to the PC on the CLI through a switch.
You have obtained the planned IP address and a nd subnet mask for the CCU collector.
You have obtained CfgTool.exe at at http://e.huawei.com http://e.huawei.com and decompressed it to the PC. You can navigate to Search for software in Software and use the package name as the keyword to quickly locate a tool package.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Operation Procedure 1.
Access the Web UI of the CCU collector and configure the IP address for the CCU collector based on the planned IP address subnet mask. − −
Open the browser, enter http://192.168.1.100, and press Enter. Enter the user name, password, and verification code. Then, click Login. A login 6-10.. page is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-10 Figure 6-10 CCU collector login page
Please enter the preset user name admin and the corresponding preset password 123456 when login in firstly. After the first login, you need to change the password to ensure access security. For details, see 7.8 How to Change the Preset Password for the CCU Collector . −
On the Configure tab page, click Network .
−
Modify the IP address for the CCU collector in the IP Address text box, as shown in in Figure 6-11 6-11..
When modifying the IP address, do not use the 192.168.1/2/3/4/5.XXX network segment. Otherwise, the CCU will fail to be connected. Figure 6-11 Modifying the IP address for a CCU collector
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide −
2.
6 Adding Devices
Click Apply.
Configure the gateway for the CCU collector based on the planned gateway. a.
Enable the CCU configuration tool on the PC. The PC IP address must be in the same network segment as the CCU collector IP address.
b.
Select the PC IP address from the Local IP drop-down list. The start and a nd end IP addresses are displayed. displayed. Figure 6-12 6-12 uses 192.168.1.45 as an example. Figure 6-12 Start and end IP addresses
c.
Click Find. The IP addresses of all CCU collectors that are in the same network segment with that of the PC IP address addre ss are displayed displayed under CCU, as shown in in Figure 6-13. 6-13.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-13 Querying CCU collector information
d.
Click the IP address of the CCU collector to be configured and click Settings , as shown in in Figure 6-14 6-14.. Figure 6-14 Select a CCU collector
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
e.
6 Adding Devices
Set Gateway based on the assigned parameters for the CCU collector, and click Config next to Gateway. Set ccu [X.X.X.X] gateway [X.X.X.X] success is displayed. Figure 6-15 Setting CCU collector gateway
6.3.1.3 Checking CCU Collector Software Version This topic describes how to check c heck the software version of the CCU C CU collector. By checking the software version, you can determine whether the software version of the CCU collector is the latest version, and determine whether the software need for upgrades.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the planned IP address, login user name and password for the CCU collector.
The CCU collector is connected to the PC on the CLI through a switch.
Procedure Step 1 Access the Web UI of the CCU collector. To ensure the security of data transmission, the transmits data after encrpting it over SSL.
Step 2 Select Monitor > Version. The value of parameter PACKAGEV is the software version of the CCU collector. c ollector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-16 Viewing CCU collector Software Version
Step 3 Check the software version of CCU collector is the latest version.
If yes, end the operation.
Softwaree Version Version of CCU Collector , update the If no, go to to 7.9 How to Update the Softwar
software version. ----End
6.3.1.4 Configuring the Level Alarm Mode for the EEUA Daughter Control Card of the CCU Collector This topic describes how to configure the level alarm mode for the environment monitor expand unit A (EEUA) daughter control c ontrol card of the CCU collector. You You need to configure the level alarm mode when the high level and low level leve l alarm modes of ports on the EEU EE UA daughter control card of the CCU collector differ from the alarm modes of devices connecting to the ports.
Prerequisites
The device is installed and connects to the CCU collector. You have obtained the level leve l alarm mode of the device. de vice. You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the CCU collector.
Procedure Step 1 Access the web user interface (WebUI) of the CCU collector. To ensure the security of data transmission, the transmits data after encrpting it over SSL.
Step 2 On the Monitor tab page, click SubCard. Step 3 Click Config next to EEUA_3, as shown in in Figure 6-17 6-17..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-17 Configuring the daughter control card of the CCU collector
Step 4 Set Alarm_Dir, as shown in in Figure 6-18 6-18.. Table 6-7 Alarm_Dir description
Value
Definition
Description
0
Low lev level el alarm
If Alarm_Dir is set to 0, the low level alarm mode is enabled. When the device reports the parameter 0, the CCU collector reports the parameter to the NetEco, N etEco, which then generates an alarm. When the device reports the parameter 1, no alarm is generated.
1
High level alarm
If Alarm_Dir is set to 0, the high level alarm mode is enabled. When the device reports the parameter 0, the CCU collector reports the parameter to the NetEco, N etEco, which then generates an alarm. When the device reports the parameter 1, no alarm is generated.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-18 Alarm_Dir setting
Step 5 Click Save. When you need to save all configurations, click Save All.
----End
6.3.1.5 Configuring Dry Contact Alarm for Main Con Control trol Card of CCU Collector This topic describes how to configure dry contact alarm for main control card of CCU collector.
Prerequisites
The device is installed and connects to the CCU collector. You have obtained the planned IP address, login user name and password for the CCU collector.
Procedure Step 1 Access the Web UI of the CCU collector. To ensure the security of data transmission, the transmits data after encrpting it over SSL.
Step 2 Click Configure, and click Device. in Figure 6-19. 6-19. Step 3 Click Config next toCCU, as shown in
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-19 CCU collector main control card setting
Step 4 Select Alarm-Enable value of main control card from drop-down list, and Y is enable the port, N is disable the port. As shown in in Figure 6-20 6-20.. 6-20 respectively corresponding CCU collector main card " DI0 "~" The port "io_0 "~" io_4" on on Figure 6-20 DI4 " port, if dry contact devices will connect to these ports in the operation, all of these ports need to enable.
Figure 6-20 Dry contact of
main control card setting
Step 5 Setting the Dir value from drop-down list, and the meaning of the parameters as shown in 6-8.. Table 6-8 Table 6-8 Alarm_Dir description
Value
Definition
Description
0
Low lev level el alarm
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
If Alarm_Dir is set to 0, the low level alarm mode is
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Value
6 Adding Devices
Definition
Description enabled. When the device reports the parameter 0, the CCU collector reports the parameter to the NetEco, N etEco, which then generates an alarm. When the device reports the parameter 1, no alarm is generated.
1
High level alarm
If Alarm_Dir is set to 0, the high level alarm mode is enabled. When the device reports the parameter 0, the CCU collector reports the parameter to the NetEco, N etEco, which then generates an alarm. When the device reports the parameter 1, no alarm is generated.
Step 6 Click Apply to save single setting information. ----End
6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, login user name and password for the CCU collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the CCU collector is prepared, prepare d, and the PC has been connected to the CCU collector over a switch.
Context To ensure the normal connection between the CCU collector collector and devices, properly set the RS485 parameters for the CCU collector, such as BaudRate, DataBit , StopBit , and Parity . Ensure these parameters stay consistent with those of the devices. This topic describes how to set RS485 port parameters for the COM1 port on the MUS02A card of the CCU collector. collector.
Procedure Step 1 Access the WebUI of the CCU collector. To ensure the security of data transmission, the NetEco transmits data after encrypting it over the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
Step 2 On the Configure tab page, click Commhub.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6-9 and and Table 6-10 6-10 lists the collector. Table 6-9 Step 3 Query the numbers of the ports on the CCU collector. mappings between CCU collector ports and port numbers. Table 6-9 Mapping between CCU main control card ports and port numbers
Port
Port Number
D_COM0
3200
D_COM1
3201
D_COM2
3202
D_COM3
3203
Table 6-10 Mapping between UEUA card ports and port numbers
Port
Port Number
D_COM0
3212
D_COM1
3213
D_COM2
3214
D_COM3
3215
Step 4 Locate the number of the port whose parameters you need to modify in the TCPPort column and set parameters parame ters in this line to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit and a mbient temperature and humidity sensor are consistent consistent w with ith those for the CCU Parity on the ambient collector port. 1.
Select BaudRate from the drop-down drop- down list. list.
2.
Select DataBit from the drop-down dr op-down list.
3.
Select StopBit from the drop-down list.
4.
Select Parity from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-21 Setting RS485 parameters
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-11 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
BaudRate
Indicates the baud rate.
DataBit
Indicates the data bit bit..
StopBit
Indicates the stop bit.
Parity
Indicates the parity bit.
even: even parity check
odd: odd parity check
no: no parity check
hw485: Huawei-defined parity check
TCPPort
Indicates the number of the port on the CCU collector.
Status
Enables the port.
Step 5 Click Save to save one piece of configuration information. To save all configuration information, click Save All.
----End
6.3.1.7 Creating a CCU Collector on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. drop- down list Step 5 Click the first drop-down list box in Type and select Device. Click the second drop-down box in Type and select Collector.
Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
6 Adding Devices
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-22 6-22 in the right pane based on the following table.The SNMP CCU collector is used as an example. Figure 6-22 Configuring parameters for a SNMP CCU collector
Table 6-12 SNMP V1/V2 device parameter description The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is SNMPV1 SNMPV1 or or SNMPV2 SNMPV2 in in Figure 6-22. 6-22.
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Read Community
Set this parameter to the read community set on the device. (set to
public by default)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description Modifying community per three months is advised.
Write Community
Set this parameter to the write write community set on the device. device. (set to public by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
c onnection test. Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.2 Commissioning the ECC500 V6 Collector Collector 6.3.2.1 Setting ECC500 V6 Collector IP Address This topic describes how to configure an IP address and a subnet mask for the ECC500 V6 collector before connecting it to the element management system (EMS).
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address addre ss (by default 192.168.1.168) for the ECC500 V V6 6 collector.
It is recommended that you log in to the ECC500 W WebUI ebUI using Internet Exp lorer 8.0, FireFox32.0, and Chrome37.0.2062.103m in Windows 7, and using FireFox32.0 in Windows XP X P. Set the TLS1.1 and TLS1.2 protocols for the browser. Use Internet Explorer 8 as an example. Open the Internet Explorer, choose Tools > Internet Options, click the Advancedtab, and select Use TLS1.1 and Use TLS1.2.
You have installed hardware hardwar e for the ECC500 V6 collector collector and a nd powered it on. A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC500 V6 collector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch. You have obtained the planned IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the ECC500 V6 collector.
Context A unified unified IP address (192.168.1.168) is configured for all ECC500 V6 collectors c ollectors before delivery.. You delivery You must reconfigure an a n IP address for the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector as required to prevent IP address conflict. conflict.
Procedure Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the ECC500 V6
collector, enter https://192.168.1.168 in the address bar, and click Enter on the keyboard. ke yboard.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 2 (Optional) Install a security certificate when logging in to the page. Click Continue to this in Figure 6-23 6-23.. website (not recommended) , as shown in Figure 6-23 Prompt message indicating an incorrect certificate
This operation is performed on the Windows 7 OS. If other OSs are used, perform this operation based on actual conditions.
6-24 shows the Step 3 Specify User Name, Password and Verify Code and click Log In. Figure 6-24 login dialog box. Figure 6-24 Login dialog box of the ECC500 V6 collector
If you log in to the ECC500 V6 collector for the first time, enter admin as the user name and 000001 or Changeme as the password. After you log in to the ECC500 V6 collector successfully, change the password for sec security urity.. For details, see see 7.7 How to Change the Preset Password for the ECC500 Collector .
Step 4 Choose System Settings > IP Address Settings, set the IP address, addre ss, subnet mask and default gateway for the ECC500 V6 collector based on the assigned parameters for the ECC500 V6 collector, as shown in in Figure 6-25. 6-25.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-25 Setting ECC500 V6 collector IP address
Step 5 Click Submit . ----End
6.3.2.2 Setting Pass-through Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector You need to set se t the pass-through parameters for the ECC500 V6 collector if it connects to the EMS, as these parameters are needed for setting up the challenge handshake authentication on the EMS.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network ne twork segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose System Settings > Pass-through Settings. Step 3 Set Enable security authentication parameters.
If the version of ECC is ECC500 V600R001C01 or earlier, set Enable security authentication to Disable. Click Submit and click OK in in the displayed dialog box.
If the version of ECC is later than ECC500 V600R001C01, perform the following operations. −
Set Enable security authentication to Enable. Click Submit and click OK in in the displayed dialog box.
−
In Challenge certification password, click Reset Password. In the displayed
In , click . In the displayed dialog box, click OK to to restore the preset password .3N:{Se7q4152H5X.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Alternatively, in Challenge certification password, set New Password and Confirm password and then click Change password. Keep in mind the password that is set in Challenge certification password. The password will be used for transparent transmission settings on the NetEco.
Step 4 (Optional) Replace the security certificate for network elements to connect to the NetEco.
1.
The NetEco system provides a Huawei-preinstalled default certificate for commissioning the connections between network elements and the NetEco. The default certificate cannot ensure information transmission security, and must be replaced by a valid certificate from Huawei if the secure communication mode is to be enabled.
The security certificate for the ECC500 collector to connect to the NMS can be replaced only when the Enable security authentication parameter is set to Enable for the ECC500 collector.
Replace the security certificate of the ECC500 collector: On the ECC500 WebUI, choose System Settings > Pass-through Settings, click Browse... to enter the path where the certificate is stored, select the certificate, and click Upload. After the upload is complete, click Submit .
If the network security certificate is encrypted, click Browse behind Select a security certificate . Then select Enable key password password, enter Key password, and enter Confirm key password. 2.
For details about how to replace the security certificate for the NetEco, see the Replacing a Security Certificate for Connection between NetEco and NE chapter in the NetEco user manual.
----End
6.3.2.3 Setting SNMP Parameters for the ECC500 ECC500 V6 Collector Y needparameters to set se t thes SNMP parameters for the ECC500 V6 V6 collector if iton connects to the EMS, asou these parameter are needed for setting up up the ECC500 collector the EMS.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, login user name, and pa password ssword for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 E CC500 V6 col collector lector over a switch.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose System Settings > SNMP Settings.
in Figure Step 3 Select SNMPv3 as SNMP Version , enter 161 for SNMP Port Number, as shown in 6-26.. 6-26
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-26 Setting SNMPv3 parameters (01)
Step 4 Click Add in SNMPv3, as shown in in Figure 6-27. 6-27. Figure 6-27 Setting SNMPv3 parameters (02)
Step 5 Set User Name, MD5/SHA Password, and DES/AES Password. Confirm MD5/SHA 6-28.. Password and DES/AES Password, as shown in in Figure 6-28 Select SHA under MD5/SHA Password and AES under DES/AES Password, or select MD5 under MD5/SHA Password and DES under DES/AES Password. Any characters complying with the system can be entered for User Name, MD5/SHA Password, and DES/AES Password. Record the specified parameters as you will need them when setting up the ECC500 V6 collector on the NetEco.
MD5/SHA Password and DES/AES Password need to be set to different passwords.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
MD5 and DES encryption algorithms are not secure. It is recommended that you set protocol to SHA and AES. The following operations use the recommended settings as an example.
Step 6 After you set the parameters, click Confirm. Step 7 Click Submit , as shown in in Figure 6-28. 6-28. Figure 6-28 Setting the SNMPv3 parameters (03)
Step 8 Click Add in SNMP Trap, as shown in in Figure 6-29. 6-29. Figure 6-29 Setting the SNMPv3 parameters (04)
Step 9 Set Tr Trap ap Target Address and Trap Port and select SNMP Version. Set Trap Target Address to the NetEco server IP address and set Trap Port to the user-defined port. The default value of Trap Port is 162.
Step 10 Select SNMPv3 for SNMP Version and a user name for SNMPv3.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 11 After you set the parameters, click Confirm. Step 12 Click Submit , as shown in in Figure 6-30. 6-30. Figure 6-30 Setting the SNMPv3 parameters (05)
----End
6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, login user name, and pa password ssword for the ECC500 V6 collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and a nd the PC has been connected to the ECC500 ECC500 V6 collector over over a switch.
Context To ensure the normal connection between the ECC500 V6 coll collector ector and a nd devices, properly set the RS485 parameters for the ECC500 V6 collector, such as BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit and Parity . Ensure these parameters stay consistent with those of the devices. This topic describes how to set RS485 port parameters for the COM1 port on the MUS02A card of the ECC500 V6 collector. collector.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters on the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. 1.
Use a PC, enter https:// https:// XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar to log in to the WebUI of the
ECC500 V6 collector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the collector.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
To ensure the security of data transmission, the NetEco transmits data after encrypting it over the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2.
Choose Monitoring > MUS02A3 > Running Parameter > COM1 Port Settings.
3.
From the drop-down list, choose COM1 Baud Rate , COM1 Data Bit, COM1 Stop Bit , COM1 Parity, and COM1 Timeout as shown in in Figure 6-31, 6-31, click Submit.
When COM1 Data Bit is set to 7, set COM1 Parity to Odd or Even.
The value range of COM1 TimeOut is 200 – 10,000 10,000 ms.
Figure 6-31 Setting RS485 port parameters
Step 2 (Optional) Configure the slots on the ECC500 V6 collector. Function of the RS485 port on the ECC500 V6: V 6: When When you cr create eate an RS485 devi de vice ce on the NetEco, you need to enter the port number for connecting connec ting to the device on the NetEco. Only the device connected to the RS485 communciation card requires a port number. The devices connected to the AI/DI card and independent deployment AI/DI unit do not require a port number.
The RS485 communications card can be inserted into any one or more slots among slots 1-4 on the ECC500 V6 collector. The RS485 port numbers vary based on slots. slots. Figure 6-32 6-32 shows the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector slots. slots. Table 6-13 6-13 shows the mappings between slots and port numbers.
During onsite operations, connect the slots on the collector based on site requirements. The following figure is only for reference.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-32 ECC500 V6 collector slots
(1) Sl Slot ot 1
(2) Slot Slot 2
(3) Sl Slot ot 3
(4) Slot Slot 4
Table 6-13 Mappings between port numbers and slot numbers
Slot number
COM1 port number
COM2 port number
COM3 port number
COM4/12 V port number
COM5/12 V port number
1
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
2
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
4
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
----End
6.3.2.5 Creating an ECC500 V6 Collector on o n the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning page is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. The management domain can be a rack, power cabinet, or DDF.
Step 3 Click the management domain and choose Design under the
. The page for adding a device
is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Collector. Step 6 Select Collector and drag the icon to the inside of the cabinet. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
6-33 shows these table. Figure 6-33 Step 7 Specify parameters in the right pane based on the following table. parameters. parameter s. Figure 6-33 Configuring parameters for the ECC500 V6 collector
Table 6-14 SNMP v1/v2 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Read Community
Set this parameter to the read community set on the device. (set to public by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Write Community
Set this parameter to the write write community set on the device. device. (set to private by default) Modifying community per three months is is ad advised. vised.
Timeout period
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-15 SNMP v3 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the WebUI of the device.
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication Password
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Privacy Protocol
Set this parameter to the privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default selection is AES128. Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device. NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Timeout period
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection Test to start the connection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click information. ----End
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.3 Adding CIM01C1 Collector(ECC500) 6.3.3.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a CIM01C1 Collector Prerequisites
The device address planned for the CIM collector is obtained.
The CIM collector is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network ne twork segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the CIM collector to the NetEco, modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the CIM collector to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the CIM collector are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 (Optional) If multiple CIMs are cascaded, set the CIM collector device address by setting the ADD DIP switch. Table 6-16 Mapping between DIP switch settings and addresses
CIM
Toggle Switch 1 (ADDR1)
Toggle Switch 2 (ADDR2)
Toggle Switch 3 (ADDR3)
Toggle Switch 4 (ADDR4)
CIM Address on the NMS or UPS
CIM1
0
0
0
0
60
CIM2
1
0
0
0
61
CIM3
0
1
0
0
62
CIM4
1
1
0
0
63
If a toggle switch is flipped to OFF, the value of this toggle switch is 0.
If a toggle switch is flipped to ON, the value of this toggle switch is 1.
BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit and Parity on CIM collector can not be set, the default setting is 9600, 8, 1 and None.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.3.2 Creating a CIM01C1 Collector on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the rack for which a device is created in Modular. Step 3 Click the management domain and choose Design under the
. The page for adding a device
is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Collector. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-34 6-34 in the right pane based on the following table. The CIM MODBUS-RTU is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Configuring ng parameters for a CIM collector Figure 6-34 Configuri
Table 6-17 MODBUS device parameter description The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS S in in Figure 6-34 6-34..
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485
Parameters for the CCU Collector. To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Write down address setting on the device. Fill in the actual value.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information.
Step 10 Choose Monitor > Topo > Data Center View from the main menu. na vigation ation tree of the displayed Signal tab, select the CIM Collector. Step 11 In the navig
Step 12 Select AO in the Counter Attribute and do not select AI, DI and DO. Step 13 Click
in the Number of Batteries row and the Operation column. In the displayed dialog, enter the Number of Batteries and click Send. When the NetEco returns Success, click Close .
Step 14 Click
in the Battery Capacity row and the Operation column. In the displayed dialog, dia log, enter the Battery Capacity and click Send. When the NetEco returns Success, click Close .
Step 15 Click
in the Data Collect Period row and the Operation column. In the displayed dialog, enter the Data Collect Period and click Send. When the NetEco returns Success, click Close .
Data Collect Period is 5 min.
----End
6.3.3.3 CIM and BIM Networking Procedure Step 1 After you press the CIM01C1 networking switch, the CIM01C1 LINK indicator changes from green "steady on" to "blinking intermittently at super short intervals", and then to green "blinking at super short intervals". The CIM01C1 enters the networking state.
"Blinking at long intervals": The indicator is on for 1s and then off for 1s alternately.
"Blinking intermittently at super short intervals": The indicator blinks for 0.5s and then off for 0.5s
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
alternately. "Blinking at super short intervals": The indicator is on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s alternately.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-35 CIM01C1
(1) Networking button
(2) LINK indi indicator cator
Step 2 Press the BIM01C2 networking switch. The RUN indicator changes from green "steady on" to red "steady on". After you release the networking switch, the RUN indicator changes from green "blinking at super short intervals" to red "blinking at super short intervals", and then to green "blinking at super short intervals". The BIM01C2 searches for and connects to the CIM01C1 network. Figure 6-36 BIM01C2
(1) Networking switch
(2) RUN indicator
Step 3 After successful networking of one BIM01C2, proceed with the next BIM01C2. Repeat Repeat Step 2 to connect the remaining BIM01C2s to the CIM01C1 network. It is recommended that BIM01C2 networking be set up in the battery sequence.
Step 4 After you press the CIM01C1 networking switch, the CIM01C1 LINK indicator and
BIM01C2 RUN indicator change from green "blinking at super short inter vals" to green "blinking at long intervals". The networking is complete.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
After networking is complete, if the CIM01C1 ALM indicator is steady on, the actual number of online devices is less than the number of nodes connected to the BIM01C2.
1 to to Step 4 4 to perform ne networking tworking Step 5 (Optional) If multiple CIM01C1s are cascaded, repeat repeat Step 1 on the other CIM01C1s. ----End
6.3.4 Adding CIM01C2 Collector(LAN Switch) 6.3.4.1 Setting Parameters on the CIM WebUI WebUI Prerequisites
Operating system: Windows XP or later
Browser: Internet Explorer 9 or later, FireFox 43 or later, and Chrome 41 or later
The IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways for the PC and CIM are in the same network segment. The default settings of the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are as follows:
IP address: 192.168.0.10
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.0.1
Context The parallel CIM communication is used to synchronize the analog parameters and configuration parameters of each CIM system. It can also be used to coordinate the measurement of internal resistance so that only one BIM is measuring the internal resistance at one time.
Procedure Step 1 Connect a straight-through cable from the PC network port to the Ethernet port on the switch. Step 2 Open Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options. Step 3 Select the Advanced tab, check that Use TLS 1.1 and Use TLS 1.2 are selected, and then click OK .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-37 Advanced settings
Step 4 Enter https://CI M I P a ad ddres ress s. The login page is displayed. After you log in successfully, the home page is displayed.
In this document, do cument, the CIM W WebUI ebUI snapsho snapshots ts are obtained from CIM V267.
The preset prese t CIM IP address is 192.168.0.10. You can set the CIM IP addre address ss on the We WebUI. bUI.
Enter the user name and password. The preset user name is admin, and the preset password is Changeme. To protect the access security, change the password after the first login.
If you enter wrong passwords for five consecutive times, the system will be locked for one hour. After that, you can operate normally.
If you forget the IP address, hold down the Default button on the CIM for more than 10 seconds. Then the ALM indicator blinks at short intervals, and the CIM IP address is restored to the factory default value (192.168.0.10).
If the user certificate is invalid, the browser prompts There is a problem with this website's security certificate . Click Continue to this website (not recommended) to go to the normal login page. The The operati operation on does not aaffect ffect W WebU ebUII functions but has pote potential ntial ris risks. ks. The Therefore refore yo you u are advised to update the security certificate as soon as possible.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-38 Login page
Figure 6-39 Home page
Step 5 Set CIM parallel parameters.
1.
If multiple CIMs need to be connected to a LAN switch, set Parallel.
The following parameter settings use the parallel CIMs as an example. For operation on a single CIM, refer to this section.
On the CIM WebUI home page, choose Monitoring > CIM System > Running Parameter > Parallel Configuration , and select Parallel.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-40 Setting parameters for the parallel system
2.
On the CIM WebUI home page, choose Monitoring > CIM System > Running Parameter > Parallel Configuration , and set CIM parallel Qty.. Figure 6-41 Setting the number of parallel CIMs
3.
On the CIM WebUI home page, choose Monitoring > CIM System > Running Parameter > Parallel Configuration , and set the IP address for each CIM in the parallel system. Figure 6-42 Configuring the communication address for the parallel CIMs
4.
On the CIM WebUI home page, choose Monitoring > CIM System > Running Parameter > Basic Information, and set Current source, Battery N wire , Total battery capacity, Batt. installation time, and Multi-Hall cur. setting.
The value of Multi-Hall cur. setting equals the number of positive or negative Hall effect sensors in a single battery string and should be greater than or equal to 1.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
After the intelligent battery monitoring system is initially connected, if the SOC and SOH of CIM differ too much from those of the UPS, set SOC correction valu va luee and SOH correction value va lue based on the reference values in the UPS.
Figure 6-43 Setting basic information
Step 6 On the CIM WebUI home page, choose System Settings > Batt. String Config , and set BIM Number of CIM , Batt. String Qty. , Single string Batt. Qty. , Batt. string No., BIM starting No., and BIM end No. . Figure 6-44 Setting the battery number
----End
Follow-up Procedure Disconnect the straight-through cable from the PC after checking that the CIM and BIM are completely networked and the system works properly.
6.3.4.2 Creating a CIM01C2 Collector on the NetEco
Prerequisites
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Context You can create a CIM01C2 collector by manually creating the CIM on the NetEco or by adding a UPS for synchronizing the CIM to the NetEco. The following operations describe how to manually create a CIM.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Battery Detector. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters based on on Table 6-18. 6-18. MODBUS-TCP CIM is used as an example. The following table lists the parameters.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-45 Setting MODBUS-TCP CIM parameters
Table 6-18 MODBUS-TCP device parameter description
6 Adding Devices
The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS-TCP S-TCP .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Set the IP address of the device. device.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. NOTE The port number is 502 by default. You can modify the port number based on requirements.
Device Address
Fixed value: 2. NOTE This parameter does not need to be configured.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Connection Mode
Indicates the connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection. If you modify Connection Mode on the NetEco, you must modify mod ify Connection Mode on the WebUI of the device at the same time. NOTE Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the NetEco and device.
You can set Connection Mode for the MODBU MODBUS-TCP S-TCP of the CIM.
NOTE Battery detectors accessed through the UPS do not support device software management.
Authentication Password
Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device. 1. Click Modify. 2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password and Confirm Password. NOTE The default re-authentication password for the NetEco and device is Modifyme_123.
3. Select Send To Device. NOTE If you click YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device is changed at the same time. If you click NO, only the re-authentication password of NetE NetEco co is cha changed nged on the ser server. ver.
4. Click OK . NOTE You can change the re-au re-authentication thentication password for the MODBU MODBUS-T S-TCP CP of the CIM. NOTE Battery detectors accessed through the UPS do not support device software management.
c onnection test. Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
6 Adding Devices
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.4.3 CIM and BIM Networking Prerequisites Before networking, ensure that all the CIMs and BIMs have no network parameters, that is, the RF_Z indicator on the CIM is steady green and the RU RUN/ALM N/ALM indicator on the BIM is steady red.
If the RF_Z indicator indicator on the CIM is not steady on (green), ( green), press and hold down the networking switch on the CIM for 10 – 20 20 seconds to clear the original network.
If the RUN/ALM indicator indicator on the BIM is not steady red, hold do down wn the BIM netw orking switch for at least 5 seconds to clear the original network.
Context To prevent prevent the BIM in a group connects to another CIM, ensure that only one CIM is under networking at a time. That is, only the RF_Z indicator on this CIM is blinking at super short intervals.
Procedure Step 1 Press the networking switch on the CIM for 2 seconds. The ALM indicator blinks red once, once , and the RF_Z indicator turns from steady green to blinking green at super short inter interv vals, which indicates that the CIM is being networked.
Blinking at long intervals: The indicator is on for 1s and then off for 1s alternately.
Blinking at super short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s alternately.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-46 CIM
(1) Networking switch
(2) ALM indicator
(3) RF_Z indicator
Step 2 Hold down the networking switch on the BIM for 2 seconds. When the RUN/ALM indicator turns from steady red to blinking green at super short intervals, and finally to blinking green at long intervals, the BIM connects to the CIM network.
It is recommended that BIMs be networked from the positive battery string terminal according to the battery cable cable con connection nection sequence. Batteries are numbered depending on the sequence of connecting BIMs to the CIM.
Step 3 Perform networking operations on the next BIM only after networking for the previous BIM 2 to add remaining BIMs to the CIM network. is successful. Repeat Repeat Step 2
Step 4 Press the CIM networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RF_Z indicator on the CIM turns from blinking green at a t super short intervals to blinking b linking green at long intervals, the networking network ing is complete. After the networking is complete, if the ALM indicator on the CIM is steady on, the number of devices online is smaller than the value of BIM number. Check that BIM number is set to a correct value and that the BIM is successfully networked.
1 to to Step 4 4 to perform ne networking tworking for Step 5 (Optional) If multiple CIMs are cascaded, repeat repeat Step 1 remaining CIMs and BIMs. ----End
Follow-up Procedure If the UPS does not charge batteries for a long time, power off the CIMs to prevent damage to batteries. After the CIMs have been powered off for 30 minutes, the BIMs will hibernate automatically if the voltage of 2 V batteries is less than 2.1 V or the voltage of 12 V batteries is less than 12.6 V.
When the UPS is charging batteries, and the voltage of 2 V batteries is greater than 2.1 V or the
voltage of 12 V batteries is gr greater eater than 12.6 V V,, the BIMs will star startt automatically automatically.. The battery voltage for enabling the BIMs to automatically hibernate or start varies under different conditions.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.5 Adding RH2288_IPMI RH2288_IPMI 6.3.5.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the RH2288_IPMI Server RH2288_IPMI serv ser ver monitoring parameters parameter s include the IP address, login user name, and password of the RH2288 server remote management mana gement port. For the detailed detailed settin setting g procedure, see section Configure the Remote BMC Management Network Port (RH2288) in NetEco in NetEco Softwaree Initial Softwar Ini tial Installation Guide. Guide.
6.3.5.2 Creating a RH2288_IPMI Server on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack ra ck or DDF, click the management domain and choose Design under
. The page for adding a device device is is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Server Step 6 Select the device and drag its icon to the rack or DDF on the right. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
parameters shown in in Figure 6-47 6-47 in the right pane based on the following table. Step 7 Specify Figure 6-47 6-47 is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-47 Configuring parameters for a server
Table 6-19 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
IP address of the remote management port
for the RH2288_IPMI server User Name
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
User name of the account used for
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description connecting to the remote management port BMC on the server The default user name is root.
Password
Password of the account used for connecting to the remote management port BMC on the server The initial password is Huawei12#$ .
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.6 Adding IBM 6.3.6.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the IBM Server Serve r Monitoring parameters for the IBM server include the IP address of the remote management port for the IBM server, and the user name and password for logging in to the IBM server. For details on setting these parameters, contact the server providers.
6.3.6.2 Creating an IBM Server on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the rack or DDF to create an IBM server. Step 3 Select a rack or DDF and choose Design under
. The page for adding a devi device ce is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
and select select device from the drop-down list box. Step 5 Click Step 6 Select an IBM server to be added and drag its icon to the rack or DDF.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
You can click the desired equipment and then choose Manage under center view view..
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
to open the page for data
.
6-48 in the right pane based on on Table 6-20. 6-20. Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-48 Figure 6-48 Configuring parameters for an IBM server
Table 6-20 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
IP Address
IP address of the remote management port for the IBM server
User Name
User name of the account used for connecting to the remote management management port BMC on the server The default user name is root.
Password
Password of the account used for connecting to the remote management port BMC on the server The initial password is Huawei12#$ .
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.7 Adding Dry Contact Interface Devices Devices 6.3.7.1 Setting ECC500 V600R001C00 Dry Contact Interface I nterface Parameters 6.3.7.1.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters After connecting a door status sensor (DSS) to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set DSS parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) of the collector.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch.
Context This section describes how to set DSS monitoring parameters when a DSS is connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the MUE05A4 card of an ECC500 V6 collector. Set the parameters based on the actual port connected to the DSS onsite.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port Settings.
Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor. in Figure 6-49. 6-49. Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-49 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
Step 5 Select Door Sensor for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list, as shown in in Figure 6-50.. 6-50 Figure 6-50 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On. Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
6.3.7.1.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters
After connecting a smoke sensor or water wa ter leakage sensor to the AI/DI AI/DI port of aan n ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) (WebUI) of the collector. c ollector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector over over a switch.
This section describes how to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor monitoring parameterss when a smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is connected to the AI parameter AI/DI_1 /DI_1 port of the MUE05A4 card of an ECC500 V6 coll collector. ector. Set the parameter parameterss based on the actual port connected to the smoke sensor or water leakage sensor onsite.
Context
A smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is a self-identification device. After a smoke sensor or water wa ter leakage sensor is connected to the AI/DI AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, the sensor type is automatically automat ically identified and you do not need to manually set AI/DI_1 Sensor Type on the WebUI.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port Settings. Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor. in Figure 6-51. 6-51. Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in Figure 6-51 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
Step 5 Check whether AI/DI_1 Sensor Type can be automatically identified. For example, Smoke 6-52.. Sensor is automatically identified, as shown in in Figure 6-52
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-52 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On. Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
6.3.7.1.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact After a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) dry contact is connected to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set device device parameters parameter s of the NO or o r NC dry contact on the WebUI.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected connec ted to the ECC500 V6 collector collector over a switch.
Context
An NO or NC dry contact is a device whose normal status signal is open (or closed) and whose alarm signal is closed (or open), such as a skylight controller.
This section describes how to set skylight controller monitoring parameters when a skylight controller is connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the M UE05A4 card of an ECC500 V6 collector. Set the parameters paramete rs based on the actual port cconnected onnected to the skylight controller onsite.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port Settings. Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6-53.. in Figure 6-53 Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in Figure 6-53 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
in Figure Step 5 Select NO or NC for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list, as shown in 6-54.. 6-54 Figure 6-54 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
NO: indicate indicatess a norma normally lly o open pen dry contact contact.. T The he dry contact contact will re report port an al alarm arm iin n the normally normally closed state.
NC: indicates a normall normally y close closed d dry ccontact. ontact. The dry ccontact ontact wi will ll re report port an alarm iin n the n normally ormally open state.
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On. Step 7 Click Submit .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
----End
6.3.7.2 Setting Dry Contact Interface Parameters for ECC500 V600R001C V600R001C01 01 or Later Versions 6.3.7.2.1 Setting Door Status Sensor Monitoring Parameters on the t he ECC After connecting a door status sensor (DSS) to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set DSS parameters on the web user interface (W ( WebUI) of the ccollector. ollector.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and a nd the PC has been connected to the ECC500 ECC500 V6 collector over over a switch.
Context This section how to set DSS when DSS is connected to the AI/DI_1 portdescribes of the MUE05A4 card ofmonitoring an ECC500 E CC500parameters V6 coll collector. ector. Setathe parameters based on the actual port connected to the DSS onsite.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A Expansion Card > MUE05A4 > Running Parameter > AI/DI_1 Port Settings.
Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor. in Figure 6-55. 6-55. Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in Figure 6-55 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
in Figure Step 5 Select Door Sensor for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list, as shown in 6-56.. 6-56 Figure 6-56 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On. Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
6.3.7.2.2 Setting Smoke Sensor and Water Leakage Sensor Parameters on the ECC After connecting a smoke sensor or water leakage sensor to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) (WebUI) of the collector. c ollector.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch.
This section describes how to set smoke sensor or water leakage sensor monitoring parameter s when a smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is connected to the AI parameters AI/DI_1 /DI_1 port of the MUE05A4 card of an ECC500 E CC500 V6 collector. Set the parameters based on the actual port connected to the smoke sensor or water leakage sensor onsite.
Context
A smoke sensor or water leakage sensor is a self-identification device. After a smoke sensor or water wa ter leakage sensor is connected to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, the sensor type is automatically automat ically identified and you do not need to manually set AI/DI 1
the sensor type is automatically automat ically identified and you do not need to manually set AI/DI_1 Sensor Type on the WebUI.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A Expansion Card > MUE05A4 > Running Parameter > AI/DI_1 Port Settings.
Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor. in Figure 6-57. 6-57. Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in Figure 6-57 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
Step 5 Check whether AI/DI_1 Sensor Type can be automatically identified. For example, Smoke 6-58.. Sensor is automatically identified, as shown in in Figure 6-58 Figure 6-58 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
6.3.7.2.3 Setting Device Monitoring Parameters of an NO/NC Dry Contact on the ECC After a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) dry contact is connected to the AI/DI port of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set device device parameters parameter s of the NO or NC dry contact on the WebUI.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch.
Context
An NO or NC dry contact is a device whose normal status signal is open (or closed) and whose alarm signal is closed (or open), such as a skylight controller.
This section describes how to set skylight controller monitoring parameters when a skylight controller is connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the MUE05A4 card of an ECC500 V6 collector. Set the parameters paramete rs based on the actual port cconnected onnected to the skylight controller onsite.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE05A Expansion Card > MUE05A4 > Running Parameter > AI/DI_1 Port Settings.
Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor. in Figure 6-59. 6-59. Step 4 Click Submit , as shown in
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-59 Setting port enabling of a dry contact
Step 5 Select NO or NC for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list, as shown in in Figure 6-60.. 6-60 Figure 6-60 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
NO: indicate indicatess a norma normally lly o open pen dry contact contact.. T The he dry contact contact will re report port an ala alarm rm iin n the normally normally closed state.
NC: indicates a normal normally ly clo closed sed dry ccontact. ontact. The dry ccontact ontact wi will ll re report port an alarm in the normall normally y open state.
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On.
Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.7.3 Commissioning the Sensors on the NetEco Some devices connect to the collector over dry contacts, such as the smoke sensor, water sensor, and door status sensor. Enable such devices devices on the collector for them to work properly properly..
6.3.7.3.1 Creating an Icon for a Door Status Sensor This section describes how to create and configure an icon for a door status sensor in an equipment room or container.
Prerequisites You have logged in to the NetEco Ne tEco client by web browser
Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > Topo > Data Center View from the main menu. The Data Center View window is displayed.
Step 2 In the 3D vi view ew editing window, click
. The Toolb Toolbox ox dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Drag
to the required position position in the view. view. The Property Panel dialog box is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-61. 6-61.
You can drag
in the toolbox to create an icon for a door status sensor.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-61 Property Panel
Step 4 Type the name for the icon and click
. The dialog box for selecting pictures is
6-62.. displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-62 1.
In the Setting Rule dialog box, configure names for rules and configure the icon to display the door open status at a high level level or low level. level.
2.
Click OK .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-62 Setting Rule
Step 5 In the Extend Properties pane in the Property Panel dialog box, click
following followin g the
Attribute to configure data for the door status sensor icon.
Step 6 On the displayed displayed Select Data page, select Managed Object and Attribute , as shown in Figure 6-63 6-63.. Then, click OK . After the managed object and counter are bound, you can remotely open and close a door using the door status sensor icon.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide 1. Click the door status sensor icon and choose Close or Open under
6 Adding Devices .
2. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes .
Figure 6-63 Select managed object and attribute
Step 7 In the Extend Properties pane in the Property Panel dialog box, click
following followin g the Current Alarm. The Select Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-64 6-64.. Select alarms to be bound to the icon.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-64 Binding alarms
Step 8 Click OK . You can bind a maximum of 20 alarms to a measur measurement ement object. After an alarm is bound with a device d evice icon, the color of the device icon will be changed to that of the color indicating that the bound alarm is generated.
6-65.. Step 9 Configure basic properties for the icon, as show in in Figure 6-65
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-65 Basic properties of the icon
----End
6.3.7.3.2 Create the Water Sensor This section describes how to create the Water Sensor icons to bind the managed objects, indicators, and alarms.
Prerequisites You have logged in to the NetEco Ne tEco client by web browser
Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > Topo > Data Center View from the main menu. The Data Center View window is displayed.
Step 2 In the 3D vi view ew editing area, click
Step 3 Drag
on the toolbar. toolbar. The Toolbox dialog box is displayed.
to the required position position in the view. view. The Property Panel dialog box is 6-66.. displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-66
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-66 Property Panel
Step 4 Click
. In the Select Data dialog box, select managed objects and indicators, as shown in in Figure 6-67 6-67..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-67 Selecting managed objects and indicators
Step 5 Click OK . Step 6 In the Property Panel dialog box, click
following the Current Alarm text. The dialog box for selecting an alarm is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-68. 6-68.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-68 Binding alarms
Step 7 Click OK . You can bind a maximum of 20 alarms to a measur measurement ement object. After an alarm is bound with a d evice icon, the color of the device icon will be changed to that of the color indicating that the bound alarm is generated.
----End
6.3.7.3.3 Create the Smoke Sensor This section describes how to create the Smoke Sensor icons to bind the managed mana ged objects, indicators, and alarms.
Prerequisites You have logged in to the NetEco Ne tEco client by web browser
Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > Topo > Data Center View from the main menu. The Data Center View window is displayed.
view ew editing area, click Step 2 In the 3D vi
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
on the toolbar. toolbar. The Toolbox dialog box is displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 3 Drag
to the required position position in the view. view. The Property Panel dialog box is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-69. 6-69.
Figure 6-69 Property Panel
Step 4 Click
. In the Select Data dialog box, select managed objects and indicators, as shown in in Figure 6-70 6-70..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-70 Selecting managed objects and indicators
Step 5 Click OK . Step 6 In the Property Panel dialog box, click
following the Current Alarm text. The dialog box for selecting an alarm is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-71. 6-71.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-71 Binding alarms
Step 7 Click OK . You can bind a maximum of 20 alarms to a measur measurement ement object. After an alarm is bound with a device d evice icon, the color of the device icon will be changed to that of the color indicating that the bound alarm is generated.
----End
6.3.7.3.4 Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco
Prerequisites You have logged in to the NetEco client.
Context The ECC500 V6 supports two access a ccess packages: MED_Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_SNMP_V1.1 and MED_Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_SNMP_V1.2. Obtain the method for modifying alarm names for dry contacts on the NetEco according to the following table.
Table 6-21 References for different access packages
ECC500 V6 Access Package
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Reference Section
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
ECC500 V6 Access Package
Reference Section
MED_Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_S NMP_V1.1
Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco (for V1.1)
MED_Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_S NMP_V1.2
Modifying Alarm on the NetEco (forNames V1.2) for Dry Contacts
Query the version of the ECC500 V6 access package as follows: Log in to the PowerEcho, choose NetEco Management > NetEco/Mediation software Installation > Installed Mediation Software Software, and view the version number in the list. Figure 6-72 Querying the ECC500 V6 version number
For details about how to modify the alarm names for ECC500 V3 dry contacts, see Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco (for V1.1).
Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco (for V1.1) 1.
Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
2.
In the navigation tree on the left, select a collector in the rack to switch to the rack desig design n
page. 3. In the parameters setting area of the collector, expand the corresponding Extended Info tab, as shown in the following figure. The mapping relationship between the Extended Info tab name and the collector port is displayed on the NetEco as follows: −
If the dry contact is connected through an independent deployment AI/DI unit, see Table 6-22 and Table 6-23 6-23 for the mapping. 6-22 and
−
If the dry contact is connected through an AI/DI expansion card, see see Table 6-24 6-24 for the mapping.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-73 Extended information of the ECC500 V6 collector on the NetEco
Table 6-22 Mapping between the Extended Info tab name and the collector port and independent deployment AI/DI AI/DI unit
Extended Info Tab Name on
Measurement Object
Slot Number of the RS485
Port Number of the RS485
Communicati ons Address
the NetEco
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Card
Card
of the independent deployment AI/DI unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Extended Info Tab Name on the NetEco
Measurement Object
Slot Number of the RS485 Card
Port Number of the RS485 Card
Communicati ons Address of the independent deployment AI/DI unit
Extended Info/MUE06A1
31
3
COM4
1
Extended Info/MUE06A2
32
3
COM5
1
Extended Info/MUE06A3
33
3
COM4
2
Extended Info/MUE06A4
34
3
COM5
2
Extended Info/MUE06A5
35
4
COM4
1
Extended Info/MUE06A6
36
4
COM5
1
Extended Info/MUE06A7
37
4
COM4
2
Extended Info/MUE06A8
38
4
COM5
2
Table 6-23 Mapping between independent deployment AI/DI unit communications address and DIP switch
Communications Address of the independent deployment AI/DI unit
SW1
SW2
SW3
1
OFF
ON
ON
2
ON
OFF
ON
Table 6-24 Mapping between Extended Info tab name and slot number of the AI/DI expansion card
Extended Info Tab Name
Measurement Object
Slot Number of the
on the NetEco
AI/DI Expansion Card
Extended Info/MUE05A1
21
1
Extended Info/MUE05A2
22
2
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Extended Info Tab Name on the NetEco
Measurement Object
Slot Number of the AI/DI Expansion Card
Extended Info/MUE05A3
23
3
Extended Info/MUE05A4
24
4
4.
Change the dry contact counter name of the collector in the correspondi corre sponding ng text box. For example, if the independent deployment AI/DI AI/DI unit is MUE06A1 aand nd the dry contact is connected through the AI/DI_1 port, modify the counter name in the MUE06A1_AI_DI_1 text box. After a dry contact signal name is modified, the alarm name corresponding to the dry contact signal is automatically modified.
5.
Click
to save save the changes.
Modifying Alarm Names for Dry Contacts on the NetEco (for V1.2) 1.
On the main menu, choose Alarm > Alarm Operation > Alarm Settings to go to the Alarm Settings page.
2.
In the navigation pane on the left, choose Custom Alarm > Redefine Alarm.
3.
Click Create .
4.
Click Select Alarm. In the displayed dialog box, select Collector_HUAWEI_ECC500V6_SNMP for Device Typ Typee on the left, select the alarm name to be modified modified on the right, and click OK .
5.
Specify New Alarm Name , Alarm Type, and Alarm Severity, and click Next.
6.
Select an applicable scope.
Applicable Scope
Description
All Objects
The alarm name modification applies to all ECC500 V6 devices in the data center.
Custom
The alarm name modification applies to the ECC500 V6 devices in the selected management domain.
6.3.7.3.5 Modifying Performance Counters for Dry Contacts on the NetEco
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You hav ha ve ccreated reated an ECC500 collector in the Date Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the
main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Click
in the toolbar to access Counter Rename .
Step 3 In the navigation pane on the left, select a device.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 4 Click the Counter tab and modify performance counter names. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
6.3.7.4 Commissioning the Skylight Ceiling Controller This section describes how to commission the skylight ceiling controller.
Prerequisites You have connected cables c ables by following instructions in Connecting Monitoring Monitor ing Cables to a WCON-22Z Skylight Ceiling Controller and Connecting a Monitoring Cable to a WCON-14Z Skylight Controller and performed the following operations:
Connect the ALM signal port to a dry contact port on the collector.
Connect the REMOTE OPEN signal port to the DO port on the collector.
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, login user name, and pa password ssword for the ECC500 V6 collector.
You have prepared prepar ed a PC which is in the same IP address segment as the ECC500 collector and connected the PC to the ECC500 over a LAN switch.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the sensor types for ECC ports.
This section describes how to set skylight controller monitoring parameters when the following scenario is used as an example: The POWER ALM port of the the skylight controller is connected to the AI/DI_1 port of the MUE05A4 card ca rd of the ECC500 V6 ccollector ollector,, the SMG ALM port is connected to the AI/DI_2 port of the MUE05A4 car card d of the ECC500 V6 collector, and the REMOTE port is connected to the DO port of the MUE05A4 card of the ECC500 V6 collector. Set the parameters parame ters based on the actual port to which the skylight controller is connected onsite. 1.
Log in to the WebUI of the ECC collector.
2.
Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port Settings.
3.
Set AI/DI_1 Sensor to Enable, as shown in in Figure 6-74. 6-74.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-74 Enabling a dry contact port
4. 5.
Click Submit . 6-75.. Select NC for AI/DI_1 Sensor Type from the drop-down list, as shown in in Figure 6-75 Figure 6-75 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact
6.
Click Submit .
7.
Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > AI/DI_2 Port Settings.
8.
Set AI/DI_2 Sensor to Enable, as shown in in Figure 6-76. 6-76.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-76 Enabling a dry contact_02
9.
Click Submit .
10. Select NO for AI/DI_2 Sensor Type from the drop-down drop- down list, as shown in in Figure 6-77 6-77.. Figure 6-77 Setting the sensor type of a dry contact_02
11. Click Submit . 12. Choose Monitoring > MUE05A4 > System Parameters > DO Control. 6-78.. 13. Select Manual for DO Settings from the drop-down list, as shown in in Figure 6-78
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-78 Setting the DO port type
14. Click Submit .
Step 2 Change the corresponding dry contact counter names of the collector. For details, see Modifying the Counter Names of the Dry Contact on the NetEco.
Step 3 Check whether the skylight controller settings are changed successfully. 1.
Click collector and choose Manage in
2.
When an alarm is generated for the device next time, the alarm will contain the new device name in the Alarm tab.
to switch to the Overview page.
Table 6-25 Counters required on the teleindication page for successful modification of skylight controller settings
Counter
Meas
Curre
Name
urem ent Obje ct
Skylight Ceiling Controller DI Status
Skylight Ceiling
Collec
Collec
Count
Count
Opera
nt Value
tion Perio d (s)
t Time
er Attrib ute
er Grou p
tion
24
Open
10
2014/1 1/19 14:00: 00
DI
MUE0 5A Operat e Param eters
24
Norma l
10
2014/1 1/19
DI
MUE0 5A
Unit
Controller Power Output Alarm Status
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
14:00: 00
Operat e Param eters
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Counter Name
Meas urem ent Obje ct
Curre nt Value
Skylight Ceiling Controller Power Output Status
24
Skylight Ceiling Controller DO Status
24
Unit
Collec tion Perio d (s)
Collec t Time
Count er Attrib ute
Count er Grou p
Open
10
2014/1 1/19 14:00: 00
DI
MUE0 5A Operat e Param eters
Open
10
2014/1 1/19 14:00: 00
DI
MUE0 5A Operat e Param eters
Opera tion
Table 6-26 Counters required on the telecontrol page for successful modification of skylight controller settings
Count er Name
Measu remen t Object
Curre nt Value
Skyligh t Ceiling Control ler Operate
24
Skyligh t Ceiling Control ler Enable
24
Unit
Collec tion Period (s)
Collec t Time
Count er Attrib ute
Count er Group
Close
30
2014/1 1/19 14:00:3 0
DO
MUE0 5A Config Parame ters
Close
30
2014/1 1/19 14:00:3 0
DO
MUE0 5A Config Parame ters
Operat ion
In the previous table, these parameters can be modified: Current Value , Collection Period (s), and Collect Time .
Step 4 Simulate the following conditions to check whether the skylight controller reports an alarm to
the NetEco:
Smoke sensor: Blow smoke to the smoke sensor and wait until an alarm is generated. The alarm is cleared after the skylight controller is powered on again.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Temperature sensor: Use a heat gun to blow hot air to the sensor. An alarm alarm is generated genera ted when the temperature exceeds 58°C (default value) and the alarm is cleared when the temperature drops below 58°C.
Log in to the NetEco. Choose Alarm > Alarm View > Current Alarms from the main ma in menu. View View the alarm of the skyligh sky lightt controller on the Current Alarms page.
Step 5 (Optional) Check the function of remotely opening the skylight controller. Click Click
to open the Monitor Information page of the collector for DO operation, as shown in the following figure.
After remotely opening the skylight controller using DO, you must perform the Close operation so that the skylight controller can be manually closed. When operating the DO remotely r emotely,, Do Settings must be Manual . Otherwise, the operation command cannot be sent. Figure 6-79 Skylight controller DO operation page
----End
6.3.8 Adding a Fire Controller 6.3.8.1 Creating a Fire Controller on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 Select the equipment room in the management domain, and double-click the management domain. The page for adding a device is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Fire Controller. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-80 6-80 in the right pane based base d on the following table. The Step 7 Specify parameters shown in MODBUS-RTU fire controller is used as an example. Figure 6-80 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU fire controller
Table 6-27 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.9 Adding Temperature Sensors Sensors 6.3.9.1 Setting Temperature Sensor Monitoring Parameters After connecting a temperature tempe rature se sensor nsor to the AI/DI port on the independent deployment AI/DI unit of an ECC500 V6 collector, you need to set temperature sensor monitoring parameters on the web user interface (WebUI) (WebUI) of the collector.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, and login user name and password for the ECC500 V6 collector. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the ECC500 V6 collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the ECC500 V6 collector collector o ov ver a switch.
Context
Procedure
Perform operations described in this section only when the independent deployment AI/DI unit of the NTC sensor is connected to the communications cards in slot 3 or 4 of the ECC500 collector.
Temperature sensors can be automatically identified and do not need manual setting.
Step 1 Log in to the WebUI of the ECC500 V6 collector. Step 2 Choose Monitoring > MUE06A1 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port Settings. Step 3 Select Enable for AI/DI_1 Sensor.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
enabling of an NTC sensor Figure 6-81 Setting port enabling
Step 4 Click Submit . Step 5 Check whether AI/DI_1 Sensor Type is automatically automatica lly id identified entified as NTC. Figure 6-82 Setting the sensor type of an NTC sensor
Step 6 Set AI/DI_1 Power Supply to On. Step 7 Click Submit . ----End
6 Adding Devices
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.9.2 Setting Device IP Addresses of Temperature Sensors Prerequisites You have connected a temperature sensor to the AI/DI AI/DI port on an independent deployment AI/DI unit of an ECC500 V6 collector.
Context
This section applies to an ECC500 V6 collector. If the temperature sensor is connected to an ECC800 collector, skip operations in this section.
The device IP address of the independent deployment dep loyment AI/DI AI/DI un it connected to a temperature sensor is the device IP address of the temperature temper ature sensor. You You need to set such an IP address to 1 or 2 by following the instructions provided in this section. sect ion.
Procedure Step 1 Use the DIP switch on the independent deployment AI/DI unit of an ECC500 V6 collector to set the device IP address to 1 or 2. Fig Figure ure 6-83 6- 83 shows the DIP switch, and and Table 6-28 6-28 describes the setting method. Figure 6-83 DIP switch of an independent deployment AI/DI unit
(1) DIP switch on an independent deployment AI/DI unit of an ECC500 V6 collector
The DIP bits are bit 1, bit 2, bit 3, and bit 4 from the left to the right. Toggle switches 1 – 1 – 3 specify the address of the independent deployment AI/DI unit. T Toggle oggle switch 4 specifies specif ies the address of the RS485 build-out resistor. Turning a bit to 0 indicates that the bit is in the OFF status and turning a bit to 1 indicates that the bit is in the ON status. Table 6-28 Setting device IP addresses through a DIP switch
IP Address
DIP Bit 1
DIP Bit 2
DIP Bit 3
1
OFF
ON
ON
2
ON
OFF
ON
The device address for the independent deployment AI/DI unit can only be set to 1 or 2.
Record the preset device IP addresses because you need to type the information in the NetEco system when adding a temperature sensor to the NetEco.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
connect ing the independent deployment AI/DI unit and the ECC500 Step 2 Remove the cable connecting communications card, and reconnect the cable to restart the independent deployment AI/DI unit. ----End
6.3.9.3 Creating an NTC Sensor on the NetEco Ne tEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 The management domain can be a modular, rack, or equipment room. If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain and choose Design under adding a device is displayed. Otherwise, skip this step.
. The page for
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Sensor Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-84 6-84 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU NTC Sensor is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Configuring ng MODBUS-R MOD BUS-RTU TU NTC N TC Sensor parameters para meters Figure 6-84 Configuri
Table 6-29 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
IP address
Indicates the IP address of the collector.
6 Adding Devices
Port
The NTC port number is the same as the ECC port number for the external AI/DI Unit.for Fill the actual by referring to Setting RS485 Parameters theinECC500 V6value Collector.
Device address
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
The devi device ce address is configured usi using ng the DIP switch of the external
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description AI/DI Unit. Fill in the actual value by referring to Setting Device IP Addresses of NTC Sensors.
Offset
The offset value varies with the ports on the external AI/DI Unit. The following figure shows the ports on the external exter nal AI/DI Unit. If the NTC sensor is connected to port AI/DI_1, the offset is 0. If the NTC sensor is connected to port AI/DI_2, the offset is 1, and so on.
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.10 Adding an Ambient Temperature and Humidity Sensor 6.3.10.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for f or an Ambient Temperature Temperature a and nd Humidity Sensor Prerequisites
The device address planned for the ambient temperature temperat ure and humidity sensor is obtained.
The ambient temperature and humidity sensor connects to the collector and displays values on the display panel.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the ambient temperature and humidity sensor to the NetEco, set monitoring parameter s, such as the device parameters, device address a ddress and baud rate, on the sensor, and then modify the port parameterss for the collector connecting to the parameter the sensor to ensure that the v values alues of BaudRate , DataBit , StopBit, and Parity on the sensor are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Hold down Set on the display panel of the ambient temperature aand nd humidity sensor for 2
seconds.
Step 2 When Add is displayed, set the device address by pressing + and -. When creating an ambient temperature and humidity sensor on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Step 3 Press Set.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
re tain the default value or change the baud rate by pressing + and -. Step 4 When bAu is displayed, retain Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
Baud rates 12, 24, 48, and 96 on the temperature and humidity sensor panel represent 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600, respectively. r espectively.
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity for the ambient temperature and humidity sensor cannot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None r respectively. espectively.
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 StopBit , and Parity of the device. For ECC collector settings, see Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.10.2 Creating a Temperature and Humidity Humidity Sensor on the NetEco N etEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 The management domain can be a modular, rack, room, room-shape node, or container DC. If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain and choose Design under The page for adding a device is displayed. Otherwise, skip this step.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Sensor. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-85 6-85 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU T/H sensor is used as an example.
.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-85 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU T/H sensor
Table 6-30 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
6 Adding Devices
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setti Setting ng RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.11 Adding a Water Leakage Sensor 6.3.11.1 Creating a Water Leakage Sensor on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack ra ck or DDF, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder
. The page for adding a device device is is di displayed. splayed. Otherwi Otherwise, se, skip this step
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Sensor. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-86 6-86 in the right pane based on the following table. The Step 7 Specify parameters shown in MODBUS-RTU water leakage sensor is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-86 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU water leakage sensor
Table 6-31 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the device. device.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.12 Adding a Hydrogen Sensor 6.3.12.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Hydrogen Sensor Prerequisites
The device address planned for the hydrogen sensor is obtained.
The hydrogen sensor is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the hydrogen sensor to the NetEco, modify the port parameters paramete rs for the collector connecting to the hydrogen sensor to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the hydrogen sensor are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set the hydrogen sensor device address by setting the ADD dual in-line package (DIP) on the hydrogen detector RS485 monitoring card.
If a toggle switch is flipped to OFF, the value of this toggle switch is 1.
If a toggle switch is flipped to ON, the value of this toggle switch is 0.
Table 6-32 Mapping between Hydrogen Sensor communications address and DIP switch
Communicati ons Address
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
1
1
4
0
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
1
6
0
1
1
0
7
0
1
1
1
8
1
0
0
0
9
1
0
0
1
10
1
0
1
0
11
1
0
1
1
12
1
1
0
0
13
1
1
0
1
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Communicati ons Address
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
14
1
1
1
0
15
1
1
1
1
BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit and Parity on hydrogen sensor can not be set, the default setting is 9600, 8, 1 and None .
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 StopBit , and Parity of the device. For ECC collector settings, see Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.12.2 Creating a Hydrogen Sensor on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, click the management domain and choose Design under
. The page for adding a device device is displayed. Otherwi Otherwise, se, ski skip p this step.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Sensor. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-87 6-87 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU hydrogen detector is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-87 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU hydrogen detector
MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description Table 6-33 MODBUS-R
Parameter
Description
6 Adding Devices
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.13 Adding the Access Management System 6.3.13.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the A8802T or A8804T Access Controller Prerequisites
You hav ha ve obtained obta ined the IP address planned for the access a ccess controller.
The access controller has been connected to the switch.
A PC with an IP address which is in the same network segment with that of the access controller connects to the access controller over a switch.
Obtain IPConfig.zip from http://tycosun.com and decompress it to your PC.
Context Before connecting the access controller to the NetEco, you need to set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway, fo forr the access a ccess controller.
Procedure access ess controller to ON to restart the access Step 1 Switch the toggle switches 1 and 2 of the acc controller.
Step 2 Decompress the tool dedicated to modifying the access controller IP address and install it on a PC.
Step 3 Click Start on the left corner of the PC, and click click
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
If the system displays the Win Windows dows security alert after you click
, click Unblock .
Step 4 Click Search. The tool displays the searched access controller, as shown in in Figure 6-88. 6-88. Figure 6-88 Searching for the access controller IP address
Step 5 Choose a access controller, click IP Config to modify access controller parameters, as shown in in Figure 6-89 6-89..
Device IP address: Enter the IP address planned for the access acce ss controller. controller.
CCenter IP address: Enter the IP address of the NetEco server that the access controller connects to.
Sub Net Mask: Enter the subnet mask planned for the access controller.
Gateway: Enter the gateway planned for the access controller.
Figure 6-89 Setting the access controller IP address
Step 6 Click OK .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
access ess controller to OFF to restart the access Step 7 Switch the toggle switches 1 and 2 of the acc controller. ----End
6.3.13.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the A8802RS or A8804RS Access Controller Procedure 6-34.. in Table 6-34 Step 1 Set the address of the access controller using the DIP toggle switches, as shown in Table 6-34 Setting the address of the access controller
Address Value
Toggle switch 1
Toggle switch switc h 2
0
OFF
OFF
1
ON
OFF
2
OFF
ON
3
ON
ON
Step 2 Set the baud rate of the access controller to 19200. The preset data bit, stop bit, and check bit are 8, 1, and none respectively. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting Setting RS485 Parameters Para meters for the CCU Collector Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setti Setting ng RS485 Parameters Para meters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.13.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller Context This section applies to the settings of the card reader with a keypad, fingerprint and card reader, and fingerprint and card reader with a keypad.
Procedure Step 1 Set the baud rate of the NEWABEL CHD200G fingerprint controller to 9600 on the ECC500 E CC500 collector. The preset pr eset address is 1. The address a ddress does not need to be set. When ccreating reating the device on the NetEco, set Device Address to 1.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.13.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for f or the Shengjiu_MS899 Electronic Door Lock 1.
The address addre ss of the MS899 electronic door lock is 1, when creating an MS899 on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
2.
Set the baud rate of the access controller to 9600. The preset data bit, stop bit, and check bit are 8, 1, and none respectively. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting Setting RS485 Parameters Para meters for the CCU Collector Collector . For ECC Setting ng RS485 Parameters Para meters for the ECC500 V6 Collector Collector . collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setti
6.3.13.5 Creating an A8802RS/A8804RS Access Controller on the NetEco You can add a dd an access controller to an equip e quipment ment room, container, c ontainer, rack, or modular for security management.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
You have the operation rights for Access Control Management and Data Center Planning.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Access Control Management from the main menu. The Access Control Management window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Create on the Controllers tab page. The Data Center Planning page is displayed.
Step 3 Add an access controller to the Data Center Planning page. 1.
Select the management domain to add a device.
2.
In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
3.
Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Access Controller
4.
Select an access controller and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
5.
.
The A8802RS access acce ss controller shown in in Figure 6-90 6-90 is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
A8802RS access controller parameters Figure 6-90 Setting A8802RS
6 Adding Devices
Table 6 35 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector. To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector. To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
After an access controller is created, crea ted, its information is displayed in the list, as shown in Figure 6-91 6-91.. Figure 6-91 Checking the access controller information
After the access controller is added, format it manually in the access controller list to avoid failure in initializing the access controller. For details about how to format an access controller, see Formatting Formatt ing an Access Controller. Controller. ----End
6.3.13.6 Creating an A8802T/A8804T Access Controller on the NetEco NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Access Control Management and Data Center Planning.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Access Control Management from the main menu. The Access Control Management window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Create on the Access Controllers List tab page. The Data Center Planning page is displayed.
Step 3 Add an access controller to the Data Center Planning page. 1.
Select the management domain to add a device.
2.
In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab.
3.
Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Access Controller
4.
Select an access controller and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
5.
.
The A8802T access acce ss controller shown in in Figure 6-92 6-92 is used as an eexampl xample. e. Figure 6-92 Setting A8802T A8802T access controller controller parameters
Table 6-36 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
After an Access Controller is created, its information informat ion is displayed in the list, as shown in Figure 6-93. 6-93.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-93 Checking the access controller information
After the access controller is added, format it manually in the access controller list to avoid failure in initializing the access controller. ----End
6.3.13.7 Creating a NEWABEL NEWABEL CHD200G Fingerprint Controller on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page. You have created cre ated an access controller on the NetEco.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Fingerprint Controller.
Step 5 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-94 6-94 in the right pane based on the following table. Step 6 Specify parameters shown in
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-94 Configuring parameters for a fingerprint controller
Table 6-37 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
6 Adding Devices
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the device.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. acc ess controller to bind the fingerprint controller Step 9 Click Bind AccessController and select an access and select a door passage for the access controller from respective drop-down menus. ----End
6.3.13.8 Creating an Electronic Door Lock on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. An electronic door lock must be created in a cabinet.
Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Access Controller. Step 5 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 6 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-95 6-95 in the right pane based on the following table.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-95 Configuring parameters for an electronic door lock
Table 6-38 Device parameter description
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Name IP address
Device name Set the IP address of the data collector to which the device connects.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learnRS485 ports on the CCU for collector, see Setting Parameters the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the device.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.13.9 Formatting an Access Controller This topic describes how to format access control cards, historical records, timezones, and holidays.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
You have the operation rights for Access Control Management.
Context The door access controller synchronized by the ECC800 to the NetEco does not support formatting.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Access Control Management from the main menu. The Access Control Management window is displayed.
Step 2 In the Controllers tab page, click
in the Operation list. The confirm dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Click Yes. The access controller is successfully formatted.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
After formatting the access controller, click to initialize param parameters. eters. In this manner, the timezones are enabled. The access controller is not disabled even if the parameters are not initialized or the timezones are not enabled.
Synchronize timezonesare and then the user groups or holidays after an access controller is formatted andthe parameters initialized.
----End
6.3.14 Adding an Air Conditioner Conditioner 6.3.14.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an ACRD502 Air Conditioner Conditioner Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the ACRD502 air conditioner is obtained.
The ACRD502 ACRD502 air a ir conditioner is powered on.
Context Before connecting the ACRD502 air conditioner to the NetEco, set the IP address on the air conditioner.
Procedure Step 1 Select Configure Network on on the display panel for the ACRD502 air conditioner. Step 2 Select IP Address to set parameters, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway, for the air conditioner. When creating an ACRD502 air conditioner on the NetEco, set IP Address to the same value. ----End
6.3.14.2 Conditioner (over SNMP) Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PEX Air Conditioner Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the PEX air conditioner is obtained.
The PEX air conditioner is powered on.
Context Before connecting the PEX air conditioner to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address for the TCP/IP card, on the air conditioner.
Procedure Step 1 For details about how to set parameters, see the user manual delivered with the PEX air conditioner. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.14.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PEX Air Conditioner (over Modbus) Prerequisites
The device address planned for the PEX air conditioner is obtained.
The PEX air conditioner is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PEX air conditioner to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the devi de vice ce address a ddress and baud rate for the RS485 card, on the air conditioner, and the n modif modify y the port parameters for the collector connecting to the air conditioner to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the air conditioner are ar e consist consistent ent w with ith those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 For details about how to set parameters, see the user manual delivered with the PEX air conditioner.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a CRV Air Conditio Conditioner ner Prerequisites
The device address planned for the CR CRV V air cond conditioner itioner is obtained.
The CRV CRV air conditioner is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the CRV CRV air conditioner cond itioner to the NetEco, NetEc o, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the air conditioner, and then modify the port parameters
for the collector connecting connec ting to the air conditioner to ensure e nsure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit , StopBit, and Parity on the air conditioner are ar e consistent consistent w with ith those for the collector port.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the CRV air conditioner by using the same method of setting monitoring parameters for the PEX air conditioner over Modbus. For details about how to set parameter s, see the user manual delivered parameters, delivered w ith the CR CRV V aair ir conditioner.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a DataMate3000 Air Conditioner Conditioner Prerequisites
The device address planned for the DataMate3000 air conditioner is obtained.
The DataMate3000 air conditioner is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained. A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the DataMate3000 air conditioner to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, parameter s, such as the device device address a ddress and baud rate, on the air conditioner, and then modi modify fy the port parameters for the collector connecting to the air conditioner to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the air conditioner are ar e consist consistent ent w with ith those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 On the display panel of the DataMate3000 air conditioner, press Enter. On the displayed password screen, scree n, enter the level level 2 password for the DataMate3000 Da taMate3000 air conditioner. conditioner. The preset password is 0002. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the air conditioner for the first time.
Step 2 Select the menu such as System menu. Step 3 Select the menu such as System setting. Step 4 Set communications parameters. Table 6-39 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Monitor protocol
The default protocol is YDN23.
Monitor address
Indicates the actual address for the DataMate3000 air conditioner. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description same port. When creating a DataMate3000 air conditioner on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Monitor BaudRate
The default baud rate is 19200. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value. DataBit , StopBit, and Parity for the DataMate3000 air conditioner cannot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None respectively.
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an AP0481H Air Conditioner Conditioner Prerequisites
The device address planned for the AP0481H air conditioner is obtained.
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the AP0481H air conditioner to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device device address a ddress and baud rate, ra te, on the air conditioner. conditioner. Then modi modify fy the port parameterss for the collector connecting to the parameter the air conditioner to ensure e nsure that the values values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the air conditioner are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Open the cover of the air conditioner controller. Step 2 Set the device address of the air conditioner by rotating button ADDRESS. For each scale you rotate the button to the right, one is added to the address number. A maximum value of 15 is supported by the address number.
Step 3 Set the baud rate of the air conditioner by setting dual in-line package (DIP) switch TEST. When toggle switches 3 and 4 are ON, the baud rate is 19200; when they are OFF, the baud rate is 9600.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
To obtain the default values for DataBit, StopBit, and Parity of the air conditioner, see the delivered user manual.
Step 4 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, settin gs, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.7 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an XR066C Air Cond Conditioner itioner Prerequisites
You have obtained the de vi vice ce address a ddress planned for the XR066C air conditioner.
The XR066C air conditioner is powered on.
You have obtained the IP address addre ss and user name aand nd password for logging in to the collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the XR066C to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the XR066C. Then, modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the XR066C to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the XR066C X R066C are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Retain the default values. The default XR066C device address is 1. The default values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity are 9600, 8, 1, and None, respectively.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, settin gs, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.8 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Air Cond Conditioner itioner (MODBUS-TCP) The method of setting monitoring parameters for NetCol5000-A020/A035/A042/C025/C030 and NetCol8000 C070 – C150 C150 are the same.
Prerequisites
Y outhe have obtained the IP address, addre ss, subnet mask, and default gateway gateway information infor mation planned for NetCol. The NetCol is powered on.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Context When NetCol5000-A042/C025/C030 and NetCol8000 C070 – C150 C150 air conditioners use MODBUS-TCP connection, refer to this section for configuration details. Before connecting the NetCol to the NetEco over MODBUS-TCP, set monitoring parameters on the NetCol. This section uses NetCol5000-A035_V100R002C00 as an example.
Procedure Step 1 Tap Settings on the NetCol5000-A035_V100R002C00 home screen. administrator user name and password and tap Step 2 Enter the administrator
on the screen.
The preset user name and password for the NetCol5000-A035_V100R002C00 are respectively Admin and 000001. To ensure the access security, change the password upon first login.
Step 3 Choose Comm Settings > Modbus Settings. Step 4 Set monitoring parameters. Table 6-40 Parameter description 1
Parameter
Setting
Connection mode
If you set Link mode to Server, the air conditioner, as a serv se rver, er, supports two client connection and establishes communication.
If you set Link mode to Client, the air conditioner, as a client, can connect to a remote serv ser ver aand nd establish communication.
If you set Link mode to Server and client, the air conditioner, as a server, server, supports two client connection and establishes communication. In addition, a ddition, the air conditioner, as a client, can connect to a remote server and establish communication.
Client encryption
Enable, Disable
The default value is Enable.
This parameter is configurable when Connection mode is set to Client .
Server encryption
EMS IP address
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Enable, Disable
The default value is Disable .
This parameter is configurable when Connection mode is set to Server.
Enter the actual IP address of the EMS. IP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Setting addresses of the display display panel, c lient EMS, and server EMS must be unique. unique. Th is parameter is configurable when whe n Connection mode is set to Client.
EMS port
It is recommended that you retain the default value 16100. If you need to change the value, enter a value as required. When Connection mode is set to Client , XXX can ca n be set: in Secure mode , set XXX to 32907; in Insecure mode, set XXX to 32906.
Step 5 Go back to the home screen and choose Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings. Step 6 Set parameters. Table 6-41 Parameter description 2
Parameter
Setting
IP address
Set according to the actual plan.
Subnet mask
Set according to the actual plan.
Gateway
Set according to the actual plan.
----End
6.3.14.9 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the Air Cond Conditioner itioner (MODBUS-RTU) The method of setting monitoring parameters for NetCol5000-C025/C030/A020/A035/A042, NetCol8000-A050/A100/A030U/A040D/A060D/C150U/C030U and NetCol8000 C070 – C150 C150 are the same.
Prerequisites
The device address planned for the air conditioner is obtained.
The air conditioner is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network ne twork segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and
the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context
Before connecting the air conditioner to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the air conditioner, and then modify the port parameters for
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
the collector connecting to the air conditioner to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the air conditioner are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 On the display panel of the air conditioner, press Settings. administrators password for the air conditioner, then press Step 2 Enter the administrators
.
The air conditioner preset user name is Admin, and the password is 000001. T To o protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the air conditioner for the first time.
Step 3 Press Com Settings. Step 4 Set Baud Rate and Com address. Table 6-42 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Com address
1 – 255 255 Indicates the actual address for the air conditioner. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When creating an air conditioner on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Baud Rate
9600,19200 Indicates the baud rate. r ate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
The air conditioner DataBit , StopBit, and Parity cannot be set on the WebUI. Their default values are 8, 1, and a nd none respectively. respectively.
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.14.10 Creating a Air Conditioner on the NetEco
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Air Conditioner. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-96 6-96 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU NetCol5000 air conditioner is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-96 Configuring parameters for the MODBUS-RTU NetCol5000 Air Conditioner
Table 6-43 MODBUS-TCP/MODBU MODBUS-TCP/MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM S-RTU/TELCOM device parameter description
The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS-TCP S-TCP , MOD MODBUS-RT BUS-RTU U or TELCOM .
Parameter
Description
IP address
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
When the device protocol is MODBUS-TCP, set the IP address of the device.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
Description
Port
6 Adding Devices
When the device protocol is MODBUS-RTU, set the IP address of the data collector to which the device connects.
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
NOTE When you need to create a modbus-tcp air conditioner, specify the port number based on scenarios. If the air conditioner works as the server, specify the port number as 502. If the air conditioner works as the client, specify the port number number as 1 1..
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Connection Mode
Indicates the connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to Non-SSL Connection or SSL Connection. If you modify Connection Mode on the NetEco, you must modify mod ify Connection Mode on the WebUI of the device at the same time. NOTE Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the NetEco and device.
Air Conditioner_HUAWEI_NetCol5000-A020_V1R2C00_MODBUSTCP and Air Conditioner_HUAWEI_NetCol8000-A050_V1R1C50_MODBUSTCP can set Connection Mode .
Authentication
Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device.
Password
1. Click Modify. 2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password and Confirm Password. NOTE The default re-authentication password for the NetEco and device is Modifyme_123.
The device password should be consistent with the NetEco password.
If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on the device.
3. Select Send To Device. NOTE If you click YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device
is changed at the same time. If you click NO, only the re-authentication password of NetE NetEco co is cha changed nged on the ser server. ver.
4. Click OK . NOTE You can change the re-authentication password for the following devices.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Air
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description Conditioner_HUAWEI_NetCol5000-A020_V1R2C00_MODBUSTCP
Air Conditioner_HUAWEI_NetCol8000-A050_V1R1C50_MODBUSTCP
Table 6-44 SNMP v1/v2 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Read Community
Set this parameter to the read community set on the device. (set to public by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Write Community
Set this parameter to the write write community set on the device. device. (set to private by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-45 SNMP v3 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the WebUI of the device.
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Password Privacy Protocol
Set this parameter to the privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default selection is AES. Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
c onnection test. Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.15 Adding a UPS 6.3.15.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a HIPULSE U UPS Prerequisites
The device address planned for the HIPULSE U UPS is obtained. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system.
The HIPULSE U UPS is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the HIPULSE U UPS to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the UPS, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the UPS to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit , StopBit, and Parity on the UPS are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 On the main menu of the display panel of the HIPULSE U UPS, press F1 to move the cursor to the menu in the first row.
Step 2 Press F2 and F3 to select the menu such as Function setting. Step 3 Press F1 to move the cursor to the UPS data window. Step 4 Press F2 and F3 to select the menu such as Serial interface 1 BaudRate setting , and then
press F4.
If the Modbus card is inserted into Intellislot 2 or Intellislot 3, select the menu such as Serial interface 2 BaudRate setting or Serial interface 3 BaudRate setting .
DataBit, StopBit, and Parity for the HIPULSE HIPULSE U UPS ca cannot nnot be set on the W WebUI. ebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None respectiv respectively. ely.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 5 Press F2 and F3 to enter the baud rate. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value. Step 6 Press F4. Step 7 Set the device address, by using the same method. The device address is also the one planned for thecreating HIPULSE U UPS. TheUPS devices with the same to thevalue. same port. When a HIPULSEU on the NetEco, setaddress Device cannot addressconnect to the same
Step 8 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.15.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Galaxy7000 UPS Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the Galaxy7000 UPS is obtained. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system.
The Galaxy7000 UPS is powered on.
Context Before connecting the Galaxy7000 UPS to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, on the UPS.
Procedure Step 1 For details about how to set parameters, see the operation manual delivered with the UPS. ----End
6.3.15.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Delta 120 kVA UPS Prerequisites
Context
The device address planned for Delta 120 kVA UPS is obtained. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system.
Delta 120 kVA UPS is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector collector ar aree obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Before connecting Delta De lta 120 kVA kVA UPS UPS to the NetEco, set se t monito monitoring ring parame parameters, ters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the UPS, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the UPS to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit , StopBit, and Parity on the UPS are consistent with those for the collector port. Set parameters for Delta 120 kVA UPS by using the dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the UPS.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 For details about how to set parameters, see the monitoring card operation manual delivered with the UPS.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit,
StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.15.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Riello UPS Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the Riello Riello UPS is obtained. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system. The Riello UPS is powered on.
Context Before connecting the Riello UPS to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, on the UPS.
Procedure Step 1 For details about how to set parameters, see the operation manual delivered with the UPS. ----End
6.3.15.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000-G UPS2000 -G (over SNMP) Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, subnet mask, and default gateway p planned lanned for the UPS2000-G.. UPS stands for uninterruptible power system. UPS2000-G
The UPS2000-G is powered on.
Before connecting UPS2000-G to NetEco, you should set the IP address on the UPS2000-G, add user and set permissions on the Web of UPS2000-G.
Context
UPSs have various versions, for which wh ich UPS WebUIs WebUIs may differ. Perform operations oper ations based on the actual WebUI. WebUI. Connecting the UPS2000-G to the NetEco in DES and MD5 protocols poses potential
risks. Therefore, exercise caution when deciding to do so.
Procedure Step 1 Setting the IP address on the UPS2000-G. 1.
Press
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
next to UPS2000-G PS2000- G screen.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2.
Press
, select Settings.
3.
Press
, input password.
6 Adding Devices
The preset password is 000001. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the coulometer for the first time.
4.
Press
5.
Press
6.
Press
7.
Press and move the cursor to Sub mask and and Default GW, set Sub mask and and Default GW by using the same as the preceding steps.
8.
Press ESC to exit.
, select Communication card. to enter the IP address setting. , set the value size by
and
.
Step 2 Adding user and setting permissions on the Web of UPS2000-G. 1.
Enter the UPS2000-G IP address set in step1 on a PC browser, the PC IP address must be in the same network segment as the UPS2000-G IP addre address, ss, press Enter.
2.
Input User Name and Password of UPS2000-G, click Login. The UPS2000-G preset user name is admin, and the password is Changeme. Change the password after you log in for the first time for the system security.
3.
Select Configure .
4.
Select SNMPv3 as SNMP version and enter 161 for SNMP port, as shown in in Figure 6-97.. 6-97 Figure 6-97 Setting SNMP parameters
5.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Click Add in SNMP, as shown in in Figure 6-98. 6-98.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-98 Setting SNMP parameters_02
6.
Input the User Name, MD5 password password, and DES password, set Permission to Write, and click Add. Record the User Name, MD5 password, and DES password for using when creating a UPS2000-G on the NetEco. You are advised to set MD5 Password and DES Password to different values.
Figure 6-99 Setting SNMP parameters_03
7.
Click Add in SNMP Trap and Permission Settings.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-100 Setting SNMP parameters_04
8.
Input the NetEco server IP address in NMS addr, set Permission to Write, write 162 in Trap port, click Add. Figure 6-101 Setting SNMP parameters_05
9.
Click Submit .
----End
6.3.15.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a UPS2000 (over ( over Modbus) Modbus) Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address and user name and password for logging in to the collector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the UPS2000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the UPS2000. Then, modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the UPS2000 to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the UPS2000 are consist c onsistent ent w with ith those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set the UPS2000 device address using the DIP switch S2 on the optional Modbus card. To Toggles ggles 1 to 8 of DIP switch S2 specify spec ify the device address in binary mode. ON indicates 0, and OFF indicates 1. Table 6-46 6-46 shows an example of the address settings. Table 6-46 Mapping between device addresses and Modbus card DIP switch settings
Device
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Addre ss
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
Switch 5
Switch 6
Switch 7
Switch 8
1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2
ON
O OFF FF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
4
ON
O ON N
OF OFF F
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the UPS2000, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity are 9600 , 8, 1, and None, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.15.7 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over SNMP) Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, subnet mask, and default gateway p planned lanned for the
UPS5000.
The UPS5000 is powered on.
Before connecting the UPS5000 to the NetEco, set the IP address on the UPS5000, and add a user and set rights on the UPS5000 WebUI.
Context
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
UPS WebUIs WebUIs may vary sligh s lightly tly depending depend ing on the UPS software version. Perform Pe rform operations based on the actual W WebUI. ebUI.
The non-encryption algorithm used in UPS5000 poses potential risks. Therefore, exercise caution when deciding to use the non-encryption algorithm.
Procedure Step 1 Set the IP address for the UPS5000 on the LCD. 1.
Choose Settings > Communication. The preset password is 000001.
2.
Set IP address allocation to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask , and Gateway.
Step 2 Add a user and set user rights on the UPS5000 WebUI. 1.
On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS5000, type the UPS5000 IP address in the address box of a browser and press Enter. The UPS5000 IP address is set in in step 1. 1.
2.
Enter the User name and Password of the UPS5000 and click Login. The preset user name and password are admin and Changeme respectively for the UPS5000.
3.
Choose Config. > Site Config..
4.
In the SNMP area, set SNMP version to SNMPv3, and set SNMP port to 161. Figure 6-102 Setting SNMP parameters
5.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Click Add in SNMP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-103 Setting SNMP parameters_02
6.
Set User name, MD5 Password, and DES Password for the user to be added. Record the values of User name, MD5 Password, and DES Password because they are required when you create a UPS5000 on the NetEco. You are advised to set MD5 Password and DES Password to different values.
7.
Click Add in SNMP Trap.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-104 Setting SNMP parameters_03
8.
Set Trap Address to the IP address of the NetEco server, and set Trap Port to 162.
9.
Click Submit .
conf igured for the UPS5000, ver erify ify that the UPS5000 and CIM Step 3 Optional: If a CIM is configured communications addresses are unique. 1.
Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2.
Choose Monitoring > Comm. Config. > RS485 Settings, and verify that Address is set
3.
to 1 for the UPS5000. Choose Monitoring > CIM Param. > Basic Param., and verify that CIM logical start addr is set to 2 for the UPS5000.
----End
6.3.15.8 Setting UPS5000 Monitoring Parameters (over Modbus TCP) Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address, addre ss, subnet mask, aand nd default g gateway ateway p lanned for the
UPS5000.
The UPS5000 is powered on.
Context Before connecting the UPS5000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, on the UPS5000.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Set the IP address for the UPS5000 on the LCD. 1.
Choose Settings > Communication. The preset password is 000001.
2.
Set IP address allocation to Manual, and set IP address, Subnet mask , and Gateway.
Step 2 A network management system can be connected over SSL or non-SSL. Set the UPS5000 as follows: 1.
On the PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the UPS5000, type the UPS5000 IP address in the address box of a browser and press Enter. The UPS5000 IP address is set in in step 1. 1. Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2.
Enter the User name and Password of the UPS5000 and click Login. The preset user name and password are admin and Changeme respectively for the UPS5000.
3.
Set UPS5000 parameters.
Table 6-47 UPS5000 settings
Connection Mode (NetEco UI)
Operation (UPS5000 WebUI)
SSL connection
1. Set ModbusTCP encryption to Enable and click Submit . Path: Monitoring > Param. Settings > Advanced Param. 2. Set Authenticaiton to Enable, set New password and Confirm password password, and click Submit . Record the value value o off Confirm password password, which need to be filled filled in Authentication Password in
in the NetEco. Path: Config. > Site Config. > Authenticaiton Non-SSL connection
> ModbusTCP
Set ModbusTCP encryption to Disable and click Submit . Path: Monitoring > Param. Settings > Advanced Param.
Step 3 Optional: If a CIM is configured for the UPS5000, verify that the UPS5000 and CIM communications addresses are unique.
1.
Log in to the UPS5000 WebUI.
2.
Choose Monitoring > Comm. Config. > RS485 Settings, and verify that Address is set
3.
to 1 for the UPS5000. Choose Monitoring > CIM Param. > Basic Param., and verify that CIM logical start addr is set to 2 for the UPS5000.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.15.9 Creating a UPS on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client. You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management ma nagement domain for the device to be added a dded on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select UPS. Step 6 Select a device and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-105 6-105 in the right pane based on the following table. The SNMP UPS is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-105 Configuring parameters for a SNMP UPS
Table 6-48 MODBUS-TCP/MODBU MODBUS-TCP/MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM S-RTU/TELCOM device parameter description
The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS-TCP S-TCP , MOD MODBUS-RT BUS-RTU U or TELCOM .
Parameter
Description
IP address
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
When the device protocol is MODBUS-TCP, set the IP address of the device.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
Description
Port
6 Adding Devices
When the device protocol is MODBUS-RTU, set the IP address of the data collector to which the device connects.
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
NOTE When you create a MODBUS-TCP UPS, the port number is 502 by default. You can modify the port number based on requirements.
Device address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Connection mode
Indicates the connection mode of a device. You can set this parameter to or . Non-SSL Connection SSL Connection If you modify Connection Mode on the NetEco, you must modify mod ify Connection Mode on the device WebUI at the same time. NOTE Connection Mode for the NetEco and device must be the same.
Authentication password
By default, Connection Mode is set to SSL Connection for the NetEco and device.
You can set Connection Mode for the following devices.
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V1R3C00C01_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS2000G_V1R1C38_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V1R1C39_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_5000E_V1R2C41_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_380V480V_V2R1C00_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000S_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000A30-120K_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V3R1C00_MODBUSTCP
Indicates the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device. 1. Click Modify. NOTE After the device is saved, the Modify button is displayed.
2. In the displayed dialog box, enter the New Password and Confirm Password. NOTE
The default re authentication password for the NetEco and device is Modifyme_123.
The device password should be consistent with the NetEco password.
If the password does not meet requirements, modify it on the device.
3. Select Send To Device. NOTE If you click YES, the re-authentication password for the NetEco and device
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description is changed at the same time. If you click NO, only the re-authentication password of NetE NetEco co is cha changed nged on the ser server. ver.
4. Click OK . NOTE You can change the re-authentication password for the following devices.
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V1R3C00C01_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS2000G_V1R1C38_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V1R1C39_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_5000E_V1R2C41_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_380V480V_V2R1C00_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000S_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000A30-120K_MODBUSTCP
UPS_HUAWEI_UPS5000E_V3R1C00_MODBUSTCP
Table 6-49 SNMP v1/v2 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Read Community
Set this parameter to the read community set on the device. (set to public by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Write Community
Set this parameter to the write write community set on the device. device. (set to by default) private Modifying community per three months is advised.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-50 SNMP v3 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the WebUI of the device.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication Password
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Privacy Protocol
Set this parameter to the privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default selection is AES. Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device. NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. For the MODBU MODBUS-TCP S-TCP of th thee UPS, if a battery monitor unit (BMU (BMU)) is connected, the BMU will be automatically created.
----End
6.3.16 Adding a PDU 6.3.16.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000 (over Modbus) Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the PDU8000 is obtained.
The PDU8000 is powered on.
Context Before connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as Serial port baud rate and Serial port address address.
Procedure Step 1 On the display panel of the PDU8000, P DU8000, press Settings . Step 2 Enter the administrators administrators password for the PDU8000, then press
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
The PDU8000 preset user name is admin, and the password is000001. To protect the access security secur ity,, change the password after logging in to the PDU8000 for the first time.
Step 3 Click Communication . Set Serial port baud rate and Serial port address. Table 6-51 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Serial port baud rate
Indicates the baud rate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value. DataBit , StopBit, and Parity for the PDU8000 cannot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None respectively.
Serial port address
Indicates the device address planned for the PDU8000. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When creating a PDU8000 on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Step 4 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.16.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PDU8000 (over SNMP) Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address addre ss planned for the PDU8000.
The PDU8000 is powered on.
Context Before connecting the PDU8000 to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, subnet mask, ma sk, and gateway, on the PDU8000. PDU8000.
Procedure scre en. Step 1 Tap Settings on the PDU8000 home screen.
Step 2 Enter the PDU8000 password and tap
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
on the screen.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
The preset user name and password for the PDU8000 are respectively admin and 000001. To ensure access security, change the password upon first login.
Step 3 Tap Communication . 1.
Check that IP address assign is set to Manual.
2.
Set IP address, Subnet mask , and Gateway as planned.
3.
Click SNMP Configuration and enter to the screen. Figure 6-106 SNMP Configuration
4.
In SNMP Config. page, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3, retain SNMP Port default value 161, and click Submit .
5.
Click Add under SNMPv3 User. Set User Name. Set Auth. protocol to SHA, and specify MD5/SHA and Confirm Password. Set Private protocol to AES, and specif spec ify y DES/AES and Confirm Password. After setting the parameters, click OK .
6.
In Trap Config. page, click Add, set Trap Trap De Des. s. Address to the IP address of the NetEco server and set Trap Port to 162. Select SNMP Version to SNMPv3. After setting the parameters, click OK .
----End
6.3.16.3 Setting AVR Monitoring Parameters Prerequisites
Context
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector collector ar aree obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Before connecting connec ting the AVR to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters parameter s on the AVR. AVR. Then modify the port parameters par ameters for the collector connecting to the AVR AVR to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the AVR are consistent with those for the collector port.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure paramete rs for the collector RS485 port port based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, Step 1 Set parameters see 6.3.1.6 Setting StopBit , and Parity. For details about how to set parameters for a CCU, see RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For details about how to set parameters for an ECC, see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 see RS485 Parameters Par ameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the A AVR, VR, the default v values alues of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600, 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. respectiv ely.
----End
6.3.16.4 Creating a PDU on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Collector. Step 5 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-107 6-107 in the right pane based on the following table. The Step 6 Specify parameters shown in SNMP PDU is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-107 Configuring parameters for a SNMP PDU
Table 6-52 SNMP v3 device parameter description
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the WebUI of the device.
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication Password
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Privacy Protocol
Set this parameter to the privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default selection is AES. Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device. NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-53 MODBUS-RTU device parameter description The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS-RTU S-RTU .
Parameter
Description
IP address
When the device protocol is MODB MODBUS-RTU, US-RTU, set the IP address of the data collector to which the device connects.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test.
Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.17 Adding a Coulometer Coulometer 6.3.17.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a YD2010 Coulometer Prerequisites
The device address planned for the YD2010 coulometer is obtained.
The YD2010 coulometer is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the YD2010 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the coulometer, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the coulometer c oulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Hold down SYS for 3 seconds sec onds on the rig right ht of the human machine interface interface (HMI) screen scree n of the YD2010 coulometer to enter the menu screen of the HMI system.
Step 2 Tap Settings in the middle of the touchscreen to enter the Configure screen. Step 3 Tap COM3 on the right to enter the parameter setting screen for COM3. Step 4 Tap the up-arrow key or down-arrow key to move the cursor, and tap + and - to set communications parameters. Table 6-54 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
COM Mode
Indicates the communications mode. The default communications mode is RS485. If the value displayed is not RS485, change cha nge it to RS485.
Baud Rate
Indicates the baud rate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
Stop Bits
Indicates the stop bit. The default value is 1 and no change is required.
Data Bit Bitss
Indicates the data bit. The default value is 8 and no change is required.
Parity Bits
Indicates the parity bit. The default value is None and no change is required.
Comm. Delay (ms)
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Indicates the communication delay. The default value is 10 and no change is
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description required.
Comm. Timeout (ms)
Indicates the communication timeout. The default value is 500 and no change is required.
Comm. Retry Times
Indicates the times of resending caused by communication interruption. The default value is 3 and no change is required.
Comm. HMI Station
Indicates the communications address, namely the device address, for the HMI screen. The device address is also the one planned for the YD2010 coulometer. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When crea creatin ting ga YD2010 coulometer on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Step 5 Tap Save&Quit and then Quit to save the settings and exit. Step 6 Tap Quit to return to the home screen. Step 7 Tap Run. The YD2010 coulometer restarts. Step 8 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.17.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD800 Coulo Coulometer meter Prerequisites
Context
The device address planned for the PD800 coulometer is obtained.
The PD800 coulometer is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Before connecting the PD800 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the coulometer, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Press SET on the display panel of the PD800 coulometer and enter the correct password. The preset password is 0001. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the coulometer for the first time.
Step 2 Tap
.
Step 3 On the bUS menu, set communications parameters. Table 6-55 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Addr
Indicates the device address planned for the PD800 coulometer. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When creating a PD800 coulometer on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
bAUd
Indicates the baud rate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
DAtA
Indicates the data format. The default value is N.8.1 and no change is required. The default value means no parity bit exists, the data bit is 8, and the stop bit is 1.
Len
Indicates the Modbus format. The default value is 2 and no change is required.
If thethe NetEco displays SAvE.ALL when you are exiting after setting parameters, tap Yes to Step 4 save modification.
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.17.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD510 Coulo Coulometer meter
Prerequisites The device address planned for the PD510 coulometer is obtained.
The PD510 coulometer is powered on. The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Context Before connecting the PD510 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the coulometer, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the coulometer c oulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Hold down PROG/ESC for 3s on the display panel of the PD510 coulometer and enter the correct password. The preset password is 1000. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the coulometer for the first time.
Step 2 Press ENTER . Step 3 SyS is displayed. Then press ENTER . Step 4 Set communications parameters. Table 6-56 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Addr
Indicates the device address planned for the PD510 coulometer. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When creating a PD510 coulometer on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
bAUd
Indicates the baud rate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value.
Pro
rtu
DataBit , StopBit, and Parity for the PD510 coulom c oulometer eter cannot c annot be set on the WebUI WebUI.. Their values are 8, 1, and None respec respectiv tively. ely.
Step 5 After the modification, hold down PROG/ESC for 3s to return to the home page so that the configuration is completed.
Step 6 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for
the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.17.4 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a DIRISA20 Coulometer Prerequisites
The device address planned for the DIRISA20 coulometer is obtained. The DIRISA20 coulometer is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the DIRISA20 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the coulometer, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting connec ting to the coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Press PROG for 3 seconds on the display panel for the DIRISA20 coulometer. Step 2 The system prompts you to enter the password, input the password by pressing
and
.
The preset password is 100. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the DIRISA20 for the first time.
Step 3 Press OK . Step 4 Press
. When Adr is displayed, set the device device address by pressing and . When creating a DIRISA20 coulometer on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value. Then press OK .
Step 5 Press
and
. Set BaudRate for
Step 6 Press
and
. Set Parity for the
Step 7 Press
and
. Set StopBit for
. When bds is displayed, set the baud rate by pressing the collector port to the same value. Then press OK .
. When PAr is displayed, set the parity bit by pressing collector port to the same value. Then press OK .
. When stop is displayed, set the parity bit by pressing the collector port to the same value. Then press OK .
DataBit of the DIRISA20 coulometer cannot be set on the WebUI. Its value is 8.
Step 8 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for
the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.17.5 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PM 710 Coulometer Prerequisites
The device address planned for the PM 710 coulometer is obtained. The PM 710 coulometer coulometer has been powered on and is running properly. properly.
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PM 710 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the device address and baud rate, on the coulometer. Then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the coulom c oulometer eter to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit , StopBit, and Parity on the coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 On the coulometer home screen, tap the button under
until DIAGN is displayed.
Step 2 Tap the button under Maintenance. Step 3 Enter the password and then tap OK . The preset password is 0000. To ensure the access security, change the password after initial login to the NetEco6000.. NetEco6000
Step 4 Tap the button under
until COM is displayed. Then tap the button under COM.
Step 5 Set the values of ADDR , Baud, and Par. The values of DataBit and StopBit cannot be set se t on the We WebUI. bUI. Their d default efault values are 8 and 1, respectively.
Step 6 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.17.6 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a ABB Coulometer
Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are
obtained. A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Context Before connecting the ABB coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters parame ters on the ABB coulometer. Then modify the port parameters parame ters for the collector cconnecting onnecting to the ABB ABB coulometer to ensure e nsure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the ABB coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the ABB coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.7 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PZ80L-E4KC PZ80L -E4KC Coulometer Coulometer Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address and user name and password for logging in to the collector.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer. Then, modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector .
For the PZ80L-E4KC coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and
Device address are 9600, 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter val parameter values ues prevail prevail..
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.17.8 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a KeluMeter Coulometer Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained. A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the KeluMeter coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the KeluMeter coulometer. Then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the KeluMeter coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the KeluMeter coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the KeluMeter coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.9 Setting Monitoring Parameters for PMAC625 and PMAC720 Coulometer Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameterss on the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer. Then modify parameter modify the port parameter parameterss for the collector connecting to the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer to ensure that the values
of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure
Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the PMAC625 and PMAC720 coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600, 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.10 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PD194Z Coulometer Prerequisites
The IP address and login user user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PD194Z coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the PD194Z coulometer. Then modify the port parameters parame ters for the collector connecting connec ting to the PD194Z coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the PD194Z coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the PD194Z coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.11 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a SepamT20 Coulometer Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the SepamT20 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the SepamT20 coulometer. Then modify the port parameters par ameters for the collector connecting to the
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
SepamT20 coulometer to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the SepamT20 coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector .
For the SepamT20 coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.12 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a IG-NT IG -NT Coulom Coulometer eter Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the IG-NT coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the IG-NT coulometer. Then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the IG-NT coulometer to ensure e nsure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the IG-NT coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the IG-NT coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.13 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PM5350 Coulometer Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the PM5350 coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the PM5350 coulometer. Then modify the port parameters par ameters for the collector connecting to the PM5350 coulometer to ensure e nsure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the PM5350 coulometer are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . For the PM5350 coulometer, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 9600 , 8, 1, None, and 1, respectively. If the parameters are changed, the actual parameter values prevail.
----End
6.3.17.14 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a HUAWEI Coulometer Coulometer Prerequisites
The device address planned for the HUAWEI coulometer is obtained.
The MDU of the PDU8000 is powered on.
Before connecting the HUAWEI coulometer to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as Serial port baud rate and Serial port address.
The operation in this section applies to coulometers of the following models: Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Dual-1Phase_MODBUS, Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Dual-3Phase_MODBUS, Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Single-1Phase_MODBUS, Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Single-3Phase_MODBUS, Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Tran-1Phase_MODBUS, and Power Meter_HUAWEI_MDU-Tran-3Phase_MODBUS.
Context
Procedure Step 1 On the MDU display panel of the PDU8000, press Settings.
Step 1 On the MDU display panel of the PDU8000, press Settings. Step 2 Enter the administrators administrators password for the HUAWEI coulometer, then press
.
The HUAWEI HUAWEI cou coulometer lometer preset user n name ame is admin, and the password is 000001. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the HUAWEI coulometer for the first time.
Step 3 Click Communication .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Set modbus baudrate and modbus ID. Table 6-57 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
modbus baudrate
Indicates the baud rate. The default baud rate is 9600. Set BaudRate for the collector port to the same value. DataBit , StopBit, and Parity for the HUAWEI coulometer cannot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 8, 1, and None respectively.
modbus ID
Indicates the device address planned for the HUAWEI coulometer. The devices with the same address cannot connect to the same port. When creating a HUAWEI coulometer on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
Step 4 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.17.15 Creating a Coulometer on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page. On the Data Center Planning page, the Pow Power er Cabinet Cabine t management domain is created.
You have obtained the read r ead and write commun community ity names if the device to be added is an SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 device.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the
main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the Power Cabinet to add devices.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
The coulometer modes of a third-party meter are not distinguished. Huawei coulometer modes include: Dual-1 Phase, Dual-3 Phase, Single-1 Phase, Single-3 Phase, Tran-1 Phase, and Tran-3 Phase. Select the coulometer model before adding the actual coulometer.
Dual-1 Phase: dual inputs, single-phase output
Dual-3 Phase: dual inputs, three-phase output
Single-1 Phase: si single ngle input, single-phase output
Single-3 Phase: single single input, three-phase three- phase output
Tran-1 Phase: single transformer input, single-phase output
Tran-3 Phase: single transformer input, three-phase output
Step 3 Select Power Cabinet and click Design under
. The The page page for adding a devi device ce is displayed.
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Power Meter. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-108 Adding a coulometer
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-109 6-109 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU MDU is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-109 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU MDU
Table 6-58 MODBUS device parameter description
6 Adding Devices
The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS S .
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Write down the IP address of the collector collector to which the device connects.
Port
Write down the port number of the collector to which the device
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description connects.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485
Parameters for the CCU Collector. To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.18 Adding an Relay 6.3.18.1 Setting Parameters for a Sepam Series 10 VCB Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the VCB to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the VCB. Then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the VCB to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the VCB are consi c onsistent stent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set parameters for the collector RS485 port based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity. For details about how to set parameters for a CCU, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For details about how to set parameters for an ECC, see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . see
For the VCB, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 19200, 8, 1, EVEN, and 1, rrespectively. espectively.
----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.18.2 Creating a Relay on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client. You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwi Otherwise, se, skip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Relay. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-110 6-110 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU relay is used as an example. Figure 6-110 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU relay
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description Table 6-59 MODBUS-R
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the device. device.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.19 Adding a Transformer 6.3.19.1 Creating a Transformer on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client. You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device.
ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, ca binet, cli click ck the management doma domain in Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Transformer. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-111 6-111 in the right pane base based d on the following table. The TELCOM transformer is used as an example. Figure 6-111 Configuring parameters for a TELCOM transformer
Table 6-60 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setti Setting ng RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection test.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.20 Adding an ATS 6.3.20.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for an ABB OTM ATS Prerequisites
The device address planned for ABB OTM ATS is obtained. ATS stands for AC transfer switch.
ABB OTM ATS is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting ABB OTM ATS ATS to the NetEco, set se t monito monitoring ring parame parameters, ters, such as the device address and a nd baud rate, on the ATS, ATS, and then modify the port parameter parameterss for the collector connecting to the ATS ATS to ensure that the values o off BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the ATS ATS are consistent consistent with w ith those for the collector port.
Procedure display panel of ABB OTM ATS, press Step 1 On the display
Step 2 Press Step 3 Press
.
to move move the cursor to Device Configuration. .
Step 4 Enter the password and press
.
The preset password is 0001. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in to the ATS for the first firs t time.
Step 5 Press
to move move the cursor to Modbus.
Step 6 Press
to enter the Modbus parameter setting screen to set communications parameter parameters. s.
Modbus Address : Indicates the device address for ABB OTM ATS. ATS. The devices with w ith the same address cannot connect c onnect to the same port. When creating an ABB OTM A ATS TS on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
c ollector ector port to the Modbus Band Rate: Indicates the baud rate. Set BaudRate for the coll same value.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Indicates the stop bit. Set StopBit for the collector port to the same Modbus Stop Bits : Indicates value.
Modbus Parity : Indicates the parity bit. Set Parity for the collector port to the same value. DataBit of ABB OTM ATS cannot be set on the WebUI. Its value is 8.
Step 7 Press ESC to return to the home screen. Step 8 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.20.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a TU520A ATS Prerequisites
The device address planned for the TU520A ATS is obtained. ATS stands for AC transfer switch.
The TU520A ATS is powered on.
The IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the collector collector ar aree obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as the collector c ollector is prepared, and the PC connects to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting connec ting the TU520A ATS to the NetEco, NetEc o, set monitoring parameters parame ters on the TU5 TU520A 20A ATS, and then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the TU520A ATS to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the TU520A ATS are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Hold down Step 2 Press Step 3 Press
for 2 seconds on the display display panel of the TU520A ATS.
. The menu such as 1.System parameter is displayed.
, and then address.
Step 4 Press
. The menu such as 1.Address is displayed, which is also the device
and then or . The system prompts you to enter the password. You can modify the device address after entering the password. The devices with the same address cannot
connect to the same port. When creating a TU520A ATS on the NetEco, set Device address to the same value.
The preset password is
to the th e ATS for the firs firstt time. BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity for the TU520A TU520A ATS cannot ca nnot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 9600 , 8, 1, and None r respectively. espectively.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
. To protect the access security, change the password after logging in
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 5 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.20.3 Creating a ATS on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management mana gement domain for the device to be added a dded on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the Step 1 Choose main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select ATS-STS. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-112 6-112 in the right pane based on the following table. The Step 7 Specify parameters shown in MODBUS-RTU ATS is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-112 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU ATS
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-61 MODBUS-RTU device parameter description
The parameter description applies to devices whose Protocol Type is is MO MODBU DBUS S .
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Write down the IP address of the collector collector to which the device
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description connects.
Port
Write down the port number of the collector to which the device connects.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
c onnection test. Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.21 Adding a Power Module 6.3.21.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for TP483000D Prerequisites
The IP address planned for TP483000D TP 483000D is obtained. obtained.
TP483000D has been powered on and is running properly properly..
Context Before connecting TP483000D to the NetEco, set the IP address on the large-capacity power system.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Setting Wizard > Comm Para on the TP483000D WebUI. Step 2 Set IP Address, Subnet Mask , and Gateway based on the planned data. ----End
6.3.21.2 Creating a Power Module on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select PDU. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose
under
.
Delete
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-113 6-113 in the right pane based on the following table. The SNMP power module is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-113 Configuring SNMP power module parameters
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-62 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-63 SNMP v3 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the WebUI of the device.
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication Password
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Privacy Protocol
Set this selection parameteris to the. privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default AES Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device. NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.22 Adding a RPDU 6.3.22.1 Setting Set ting RPDU_HUAWEI_PDU2000-32RPDU_HUAWEI_PDU2000-32-1PH-20-4-M2 1PH-20-4-M2 Monitoring Parameters Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address addre ss (factory default: 192.168.1.45) of the PD PDU U2000.
You have installed the hardware har dware and powered on the PDU200 PDU2000. 0.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as that of the PDU2000 is prepared, and the PC has connected to the PDU2000 over a switch. You have obtained the planned IP address and a nd subnet mask of the PDU2 P DU2000. 000.
Context Set the PDU2000 IP address before you connect the PDU2000 to the NetEco.
Procedure Step 1 Use a PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the PDU2000. Enter http://192.168.1.45 in the address bar, and press Enter on the keyboard. ke yboard.
Step 2 Enter monitoring parameters of the PDU2000. For the input method, see see Table 6-64. 6-64. For parameterss not mentioned parameter mentioned in the table, retain r etain the default value. Table 6-64 Remarks
Parameter
Setting Method
IP address
Enter the planned PDU2000 IP address.
Subnet mask
Enter the planned PDU2000 subnet mask.
Gateway
Enter the planned PDU2000 gateway.
Address reporting the SNMP
Enter the IP address of the NetEco the PDU2000 connects to.
----End
6.3.22.2 Setting Monitoring Parameters for HPXPDU2000-16-3PH-24-6-M1
Prerequisites
You have obtained the de vi vice ce address a ddress planned for the PDU PD U2000.
The PDU2000 is connected to the collector, and digits are displayed on the LCD.
You have obtained the collector c ollector IP address and login user name and password. A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Context Before connecting the PDU2000 to the NetEco, set its device address and then modify the port parameters parameter s for the collector connecting to the the PD U2000 to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on it are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Press MENU on the PDU2000 display panel.
Step 2 Press UP until
is displayed displaye d and ADD blinks.
Step 3 Press MENU,
is displayed, and 01 blinks. The current device address is 01.
Step 4 Press UP or DOWN to select the device address value. Step 5 Press MENU to confirm the setting.
If
If
is displayed, the setting succeeds.
is displayed, the setting fails. Reset the parameter.
The PDU P DU2000 2000 BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit , and Parity cannot be set on the WebUI. Their values are 9600, 8, 1, and None respectiv respectively. ely.
Step 6 Press Button .
is displayed. Then press MENU to exit.
Step 7 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.22.3 Creating a RPDU on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select RPDU. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
on Table 6-66. 6-66. The SNMP in Figure 6-114 6-114 in the right pane based on Step 7 Specify parameters shown in RPDU is used as an example. Figure 6-114 Configuring SNMP RPDU parameters
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-65 SNMP v1/v2 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Read Community
Set this parameter to the read community set on the device. (set to public by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Write Community
Set this parameter to the write write community set on the device. device. (set to private by default) Modifying community per three months is advised.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-66 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports ECC collector, see Setting Setting RS485 Parameters foron thethe ECC500 V6 Collector. Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Table 6-67 SNMP v3 device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the device device IP address.
Port
Set this parameter to the port number of the device. device. (set to 161 by default)
Security Name
Set this parameter to the user name added in SNMPv3 on the
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description WebUI of the device.
Authentication Protocol
Set this parameter to the authentication protocol set on the device. The default selection is SHA. Support SHA and MD5 agreement.
Authentication Password
Set this parameter to the SHA or MD5 password set on the device.
Privacy Protocol
Set this parameter to the privacy privacy protocol set on the device. The default selection is AES. Support CBC_DES, AES128, AES192, and AES256 a greement. greement.
Privacy Password
Set this parameter to the AES or DES password set on the device. NOTE You ar aree advised to set Authentication Password and Privacy Password to different values.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.23 Adding a Battery Monitoring Unit 6.3.23.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a Battery Monitoring Unit Unit Prerequisites
Context
The device address planned for the battery monitoring unit is obtained.
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector collector ar aree obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Before connecting the battery monitoring unit to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the battery monitoring unit. Then modify the port parameters for the coll c ollector ector connec connecting ting to the battery monitoring unit to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the battery monitoring unit are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set the device address through the DIP switch on the battery monitoring unit.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
The device IP address of a battery monitor unit has an offset of 112. Therefore, you need to add 112 to the set devi de vice ce IP address addre ss when typing this IP address in the NetEco system. For the battery monitoring unit, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, and Parity are 9600 , 8, 2, and None, rrespectively. espectively.
Step 2 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.23.2 Creating a Battery Monitoring Monitoring Unit on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management mana gement domain for the device to be added a dded on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select the device type. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-115 6-115 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU battery monitoring unit is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-115 Configuring parameters for the MODBUS-RTU battery monitoring unit
Table 6-68 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM devi de vice ce parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485
Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector. Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the device. device.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
6 Adding Devices
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.24 Adding a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehumidifier 6.3.24.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a PREAIR-HT-901 Dehu Dehumidifier midifier Prerequisites
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the dehumidifier to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the dehumidifier. Then modify the port parameters parameter s for the collector connecting to the dehumidifier to ensure that the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity on the dehumidifier are consistent with those for the collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Set parameters for the collector RS485 port based on the values of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity. For details about how to set parameters for a CCU, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For details about how to set parameters for an ECC, see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . see For the dehumidifier, the default values of BaudRate, DataBit, StopBit, Parity, and Device address are 19200, 8, 1, None, and 1, rrespectively. espectively.
----End
6.3.24.2 Creating a Dehumidifier Dehumidifier on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the Step 1 Choose main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select Room in the management domain. Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Dehumidifier . Step 5 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
in Figure 6-116 6-116 in the right pane base based d on the following table. The Step 6 Specify parameters shown in MODBUS-RTU dehumidifier is used as an example. Figure 6-116 Configuring MODBUS-RTU dehumidifier parameters
Table 6-69 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector. To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setti Setting ng RS485
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection test. Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.25 Adding a Humidifier 6.3.25.1 Creating a Humidifier Humidifier on the NetEcoNetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning .
You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select Room in the management domain. Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Humidifier Step 5 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 6 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-117 6-117 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU humidifier is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-117 Configuring parameters for a MODBUS-RTU humidifier
Table 6-70 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector.
To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
6 Adding Devices
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.26 Adding a DG 6.3.26.1 Setting Monitoring Parameters for a P1000P1 DG Prerequisites
The device address planned for the DG is obtained.
The DG has been powered on and is running properly. properly.
The IP address and login user name and password for logging in to the collector are obtained.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the collector has been prepared and connected to the collector over a switch.
Context Before connecting the DG D G to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters on the DG DG.. Then modify the port parameters for the collector connecting to the DG to ensure that the values of c onsistent tent with those for the BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit, and Parity on the DG are consis collector port.
Procedure Step 1 Tap the Page Up and Page Down buttons until NetWork is is displayed. Then tap OK . Step 2 Select RS-485 SCADA, and tap OK . Step 3 Set the values of BaudRate , DataBit, and Parity. The default value of StopBit is 1, and it cannot be set on the WebUI.
Step 4 Set RS485 port parameters for the collector based on the value of BaudRate , DataBit, StopBit , and Parity of the device. For CCU settings, see see 6.3.1.6 Setting RS485 Parameters for the CCU Collector . For ECC collector settings, see see 6.3.2.4 Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector . ----End
6.3.26.2 Creating a DG on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the operation rights for Data Center Planning . You have created cre ated a management domain for the device to be added on the Data Center Planning page.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a device. ra ck, DDF, or power cabinet, click the management domain Step 3 If the management domain is a rack, and choose Design u under nder step.
. The pag pagee for for addi adding ng a devi device ce is displayed. Otherwise, sskip kip this
Step 4 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Step 5 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select DG. Step 6 Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 7 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-118 6-118 in the right pane based on the following table. The MODBUS-RTU DG is used as an example.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Configuring uring MODBUS-RTU MODBUS-RTU DG-Generation parameters Figure 6-118 Config
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-71 MODBUS-R MODBUS-RTU/TELCOM TU/TELCOM device parameter description
Parameter
Description
Name
Device name
IP Address
Set this parameter to the IP address of the collector collector to which the device is connected.
Port
Set this parameter to the port through which the device connects to
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description the collector.
To learn ports on the CCU collector, see Setting Sett ing RS485
Parameters for the CCU Collector. To learn ports on the ECC collector, see Setting RS485 Parameters for the ECC500 V6 Collector.
Device Address
Set this parameter to the address set on the devi device. ce.
Out Time
Timeout duration for connection test (set to 3s by default)
Step 8 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 9 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.27 Adding a NVR6128G2 and eSpace IPC Camera 6.3.27.1 Configuring Server Parameters 6.3.27.1.1 Logging In to the NVR Management System
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address addre ss (factory default: 192.168.1.100) of the NVR6128G2.
You have installed the hardware har dware and powered on the NVR6128G NVR6128G2. 2.
A PC with an IP address in the same network networ k segment as that o f the NVR6128G2 is prepared, and the PC has connected to the NVR6128G2 over over a switch. You have obtained the planned IP address and a nd subnet mask of the NVR6128G NV R6128G2. 2.
Context After the hardware hardwa re of the NVR6128G2 is installed, installed, you can connec connectt the PC to the NVR6128G2 server by using a network cable and log in to the NVR Management system from the PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment as that of the NVR6128G2, enter https://192.168.1.100:9443/nvrmanage in the address bar, and click Enter on the keyboard.
Step 2 (Optional) If the system displays the Certificate Error: Navigation Blocked page, click click Continue to this website(not recommended) . A normal login page is displayed.
Step 3 Set the user name, password and Verification code and click Login. The login page is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-119. 6-119.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
NVR Manage Management ment login login page Figure 6-119 NVR
If you are logging in to the NVR6128G2 for the first time, enter admin as the user name and super@IVS as the password. After you successfully log in to the NVR6128G2, change the password for Time. information security. For details, see see 6.3.27.1.4 Changing the Password and System Time.
The NVR Management main page is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-120 6-120.. Figure 6-120 NVR NVR Manage Management ment main main page page
----End
6.3.27.1.2 Configuring IP Addres Addresses ses of Management Servers
Context The NVR6128G2's IP address has ha s been configured when the device is del delivered. ivered. You You can change the IP address based on the site requirements. Based on the server reliability reliability,, you are ar e advised to bind network adapters.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the NVR Management system.
Step 2 Choose Service Parameter Config IP config. The IP config page is displayed.
Step 3 Set IP addresses of network adapters.
If network adapters are bound together, click Set IP, as shown in in Figure 6-121. 6-121.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-121 Setting IP addresses of bound network adapters
If network adapters are not bound, set mode to NORMAL and click Set IP, as shown in Figure 6-122 6-122.. Figure 6-122 Setting IP addresses of network adapters
Step 4 Click Submit . A confirm confirm dialog d ialog box is displayed, asking you whether to restart the serv server. er.
Step 5 Click OK . ----End
Follow-up Procedure Change the IP address of your PC and ensure that the P PC C is in the same network segment with the management ser ver. Open Internet Explorer Explorer on your PC and enter the new IP address of the management server to access the NVR Management system.
6.3.27.1.3 Enabling or Disabling Services
Context This topic describes how to enable or disable services to ensure the proper running of the NVR6128G2. When the enable systemall is used for the first time, all services are disabled by default. Y You ou must manually services.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the NVR Management system. Step 2 Choose Service Management > Start/Stop Service. The page for managing ma naging service status is displayed, aass shown in in Figure 6-123. 6-123. Figure 6-123 Managing service status
Table 6-72 6-72 lists the running status of all services. Table 6-72 Service status description
Service
Description
Media Unit (MU)
Forwards, distributes, distributes, and stores media data.
Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU)
Uses the eSpace Network Management Server (NMS) to manage network elements (NEs) in eSpace IVS.
CMC
The CMC consists of the SMU, SCU, and SRU. Controls video surveillance services, including service authentication, logic logic processing, and service control.
Platform Connection Gateway (PCG)
Manages service data, including users, rights, video walls, levels, and domains.
Complies with GA/T669, T28181, and customized protocols to connect to third-party video surveillance platforms.
Database (DB)
Stores platform data.
PORTAL
Displays services on a Browser/Server (B/S) client and provides a user interface for service operation.
Device Connection Gateway (DCG)
Connects to ONVIF devices and third-party devices.
Uniform OM Agent (UOA)
Provides unified network management
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Service
6 Adding Devices
Description agent functions.
Step 3 Click Start All . Step 4 Click Return. The login page is displayed.
Step 5 Re-log in to the system and choose Service Management > Start/Stop Service . The page for managing service status is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-124. 6-124. Figure 6-124 Managing service status
The OMU and UOA are used to connect connec t to network management systems. The PCG is used to connect to third-party platforms. If the three services are not used in actual environments, stop the services to save system resources.
----End
6.3.27.1.4 Changing the Password and System Time
Context
To ensure password security, security, periodically change c hange the password for logging in to the NVR Management system.
Before delivery, delivery, the server se rver time is set to a time based on the GMT+8:00 Beijing time zone. When the serv ser ver is de delivered livered to site, configure the time setting based on the site
requirement. −
To ensure that the generation time of videos is correct, configure the system time when the server is initially used.
−
When the system time is changed, choose Service Management > Start/Stop Service, and restart all services.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the NVR Management system.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 2 Changing the password. 1.
Choose System > Change password.
2.
Set Old Password and New Password, and click Submit .
Step 3 Changing the System Time. 1.
Choose System > Change system time . Set system time and timezone.
2.
After the system time is changed, restart all services by referring to to 6.3.27.1.3 Enabli Enabling ng or Disabling Servi Ser vices ces..
----End
6.3.27.2 Installing the eSpace IVS I VS Client Prerequisites The eSpace IVS client installation package has been obtained. To To obtain the installation package, select either of the following ways:
Decompress eIVS/ivs_cu.zip in eIVS_NVR6128_Plat_Preinstall.tar on the CD-ROM delivered with the eSpace IVS client.
Access http://e.huawei.com/ , search Client Package.zip and download the corresponding software package.
Context 6-73 describes the requirements on the PC hardware. Table 6-73 Table 6-73 Device requirements
Device
Requirements
CPU Dominant frequency
3.2 GHz or above
Memory
3 GB or above
Hard disk
300 GB or above
Display adapter
Radeon HD 6850 or GeForce GeForce GTX 550 Ti
Network port
at least one 100 Mbit/s network port
Monitor
at least 21inches
Procedure Step 1 Decompress Client Package.zip to a specified directory, for example, D:\. Step 2 Access the directory where the client program is stored. Step 3 Double-click
.
Step 4 Select a language language and click OK .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Use the default configuration to complete the installation.
Step 5 Double-click
. The login login page shown in in Figure 6-125 6-125 is displayed. displayed.
Figure 6-125 eSpace IVS client login page
The default value of User Name is super, and Password is super@IVS. Set Server IP Address to the IP address of the management unit server.
The eSpace IVS platform supports multipoint sign-on. For detail about how to configure the multipoint sign-on, see the NVR the NVR6128G2 6128G2 C Configura onfiguration tion G Guide uide..
If the multipoint access mode is not enabled, each user can only log in to one eSpace IVS client.
If the multipoint access mode is enabled, each user can log in to multiple eSpace IVS clients at different places using the same user name at the same time. The user can log in to a maximum of 100 eSpace IVS clients simultaneously.
When an administrator logs in to the portal for the first time, a dialog box is displayed, asking the administrator to change the password.
----End
6.3.27.3 Setting Monitoring Parameters for the eSpace eSpa ce IPC Semi-Dome
Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the camera has been obtained.
The camera has connected to the switch.
A PC with an of IPthe address in the for same network as the camera is prepared default value IP address eSpace IPCsegment semi-dome is 192.168.0.100), and(the the PC has been connected to the camera over a switch.
The camera ca mera has been adjusted to an appropriate angle. a ngle. For details about how to ad adjust just the camera angle, see see Installing a Camera. Camera.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Context Before connecting the camera to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, user name, and password, on the camera.
Procedure Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the camera, enter IP address of the camera in the address bar, and click Enter on the keyboard.
Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the initial initial password HuaWei123 , and click Login. After you log in to the camera successfully, change the password for security. For details, see 6.3.27.4 Changing the Preset Password for the eSpace IPC Semi-Dome. Semi-Dome.
Step 3 Choose Settings > Network Configuration > Network Parameters, set the IP address, subnet mask and gateway IP address for the camera based on the assigned parameters for the camera, as shown in in Figure 6-126. 6-126. Figure 6-126 Network Network paramete parameters rs
Step 4 Click Save. ----End
6.3.27.4 Changing the Preset Password for the eSpace IPC Semi-Dome Prerequisites
Procedure
The IP address planned for the camera has been obtained.
The camera has connected to the switch.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the camera is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the camera over a switch.
Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the camera, enter a nd click Enter on the keyboard. XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar, and XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the camera.
initial password HuaWei123 , and click Login. Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the initial
Step 3 Choose Settings > User Management. The User Management page is displayed.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 4 Enter the old, new, and confirm passwords. Step 5 Click Set. A confirm confirm dialog d ialog box is displayed.
The admin user's password is a string of 8 to 10 characters, containing at least two types of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character.
The password cannot be the same as the user name or the reversal.
Step 6 Click OK . If the old password fails to be changed, possible causes will be displayed. ----End
6.3.27.5 Adding Cameras on NVR6128G2 6.3.27.5.1 Adding Clairvoyance-Compliant Clairvo yance-Compliant Cameras
Context This section assumes that you need to connect a Clairvoyance-compliant camera to the eSpace IVS platform. You must configure the camera before connecting it to the eSpace IVS platform. The following uses IPC5701-P as an example to describe how to configure a camera.
Procedure Step 1 Setting connection parameters on the eSpace IVS platform. 1.
Log in to the eSpace IVS client as super.
2.
Click Device Mgt. on the WorkSpace page.
3.
Choose Organization Tree > Root. Click New. The Add Device page is displayed.
4.
6-127.. Table 6-74 6-74 lists lists the Set parameters for the main device, as shown in in Figure 6-127 parameter s that you must pay attention parameters attention to.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-127 Add the main device
Table 6-74 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Configuration Method
Vendor
Indicates the vendor of a main device.
Set this parameter to the vendor of a devi de vice ce that is being used. HUAWEI is used as an example.
Device Type
Indicates the device type, including IPC, DVR, DVS, and NVR.
Set this parameter to the type of a devi de vice ce that is being used. IPC is used as an example if a camera is connected.
Model
Indicates the model of a main device.
Set this parameter to the model of a camera that is
being used. eSpace IPC5701-P is used as an example. Protocol
Indicates the protocol for connecting peripheral units
Set this parameter to CLAIRVOYANCE.
(PUs). The protocols include Clairvoyance and ONVIF. ID
Indicates the ID of a main device. The ID must be
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Set this parameter to a unique value to interwork
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description
Configuration Method
consistent with that of the PU.
with a camera. The set ID needs to be added to the camera in the subsequent operation.
Media Server
If the ONVIF protocol is used, set this parameter to Device Gateway Gateway.
Set this parameter as required.
Video Standard
Includes PAL and NTSC.
Set this parameter as required. PAL is used as an example.
Name
Indicates the name of a main ma in device.
Set this parameter as required. eSpace IPC5701-P is used as an example. The value of this parameter is a string that contains conta ins 1 to 20 characters, excluding the following special characters: &""()/:".
Device Register PWD
Indicates the registration password that a PU uses to connect to the eSpace IVS platform. The default value is huawei_IVS.
Set this parameter to a device password. The set password needs to be added to a camera in the subsequent operation.
After Vendor, Device Type, and Model are specified, the system automatically displays the corresponding values for other parameters in in Table 6-74 6-74..
5.
Click Save. The device information is displayed in the Device page. After the preceding settings, the device automatically goes online. No manual operation is required.
Step 2 Setting connection parameters on the camera web page. 1.
Input XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar in the PC whose IP address addre ss is in in the same network segment as the camera IP address, and press Enter.
2.
XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the camera.
The IP address, user name, and password of the camera has been changed, as described in Ne NetEco tEco Device Commissi Commissioning oning Guide Guide.. Enter the modified values.
Choose Configuration > Network Configuration > Network Parameters. Set network adapter parameters as planned, as shown in in Figure 6-128. 6-128.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-128 Setting network parameters
Enter the camera IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for IP address, Subnet mask and and Gateway IP address.
3.
Chick Save.
4.
Choose Configuration > Network Configuration > Platform Connection Parameters . Set related in Figure 6-129 6-129.. For the pa parameter rameter setting method, seeparameters see Table 6-75. 6-75as . planned, as shown in Figure 6-129 Setting platform connection parameters
Table 6-75 Remarks
Parameter
Setting Method
Platform IP
Enter the IP address of the NVR connected to the camera.
Port number
The default value is 5080. No modification is required.
Device ID
Enter the ID parameter set in in Step 1.4. 1.4. Add 0000 after the camera ID as the ID parameter set on the camera ca mera consists of 11 figures but 15 figures are required here. For example, if the ID parameter of the camera is 12345678987 , enter 123456789870000 .
Device name
Enter the device device name.
Login name
Set a login user name for the device. device.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Setting Method
Password
Enter the Device Register PWD parameter set in in Step 1.4 1.4..
5.
Click Save to complete the settings.
----End
Follow-up Procedure After a camera is added to the eSpace IVS platform, query the camera ID which will be filled into the NetEco. 1.
Log in to the eSpace IVS client as super and choose WorkSpace > Device Mgt.
2.
In the navigation tree on the left, click the node and select Camera on the rig r ight ht page. The value under the ID column is the camera ID, as shown in in Figure 6-130. 6-130. Record the number for future use. Figure 6-130 Querying a camera ID
6.3.27.5.2 Checking Basic Camera Functions
Scenario This topic assumes that you need to check the live video and recording functions for cameras.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Live. The Live page is displayed. displayed.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Step 2 Double-click an online camera in the Cameras list or directly drag an online camera to the video playing pane. 6-131.. The live video is played, p layed, as shown in in Figure 6-131 Figure 6-131 Browsing the live video
Step 3 Manually record videos. Right-click a video pane that is playing live videos and choose Platform Recording from the displayed shortcut menu. The platform recording starts. Right-click the video pane and choose Stop Platform Recording from the displayed shortcut menu. The platform recording ends.
Step 4 View the following types of videos stored on the eSpace IVS platform.
Vi Videos deos recorded recor ded based on a recording plan. Access the Playback page. page. In the Video Query area, set Save Path to Platform. Select ca mera you want to vi view ew in the Scheduled. Set other search criteria and select the camera video deo file can ca n be searched. Cameras area. The related vi
Manually recorded recorde d videos. videos. Access the Playback page. page. In the Video Query area, set Save Path to Platform. Select
Manual. Set other search criteria and select the camera you want to view in the Cameras area. The related vi video deo file can ca n be searched. ----End
6.3.27.6 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco This section describes how to configure video parameters on the Parameter Configuration page.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the vi video deo management mana gement permission.
The 32-bit Internet Explorer 9/10/11 9/10/11 or 64-bit 64 -bit Internet Explorer 10/11 10/11 is available for video playback.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Camera Management from the main menu. The Camera Management window is displayed. na vigation ation tree on the left, click Parameter Configuration . The Parameter Step 2 In the navig Configuration page is displayed. displayed.
Step 3 Specify parameters in the right pane based on on Table 6-76 6-76..
If not all Acti Activ veX controls are a re enabled, the test connection fails after filling in the correct correc t parameter information and clicking Test. Enable ActiveX controls. For details, see see 6.3.28.10 Regi Registering stering with the OCX Plug-in Plug-in..
Table 6-76 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Example
Server IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the video server and correct IPv4 address, containing numbers from 0 to 255. The IP address cannot be 0.0.0.0.
10.144.197.253
Server Port Number
Indicates the port number of the server.
9900
NOTE The default port number for VCN500 is 9900.
Server Version
Indicates the version of the server.
VCN500
Login User
Indicates the user name for logging in to the IVS client.
Admin
NOTE Only browsing and query permissions permissi ons are re required quired on the NetEco. Configure video system users who have only browsing and query permissions.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
The default user name for VCN500 is Admin. It is
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Parameter
6 Adding Devices
Description
Example
recommended that the new user name created using the IVS be used to access the camera. Before accessing the camera, ensure that the initial password of the user has been changed changed and tthe he user has successfully logged in to the IVS.
Login Password
It is recommended that the number of IVS clients to which the user can log in be set to to a val value ue great greater er than 5. Otherwise, when the user has logged in to the IVS client, the user cannot log in to it through the NetEco.
Indicates the password for logging in to the IVS client. Click Set Password and configure the password on the displayed page.
Change_Me
If the password does not comply with the rules, please change the password on device. NOTE The default password for VCN500 is Change_Me.
Transmission Protocol
Indicates the transmission protocol. Set the transmission in the same way wa y as protocol setting the protocol using eSpace IVS. The path for setting the transmission protocol is as follows: Para. Setting > Local Parameter > Transmission protocol . The transmission protocol can be UDP or TCP.
TCP
Step 4 Click Test after configuring parameters.
During the first test, the page turns blank. Wait 30s.
If the test fails, a message indicating a connection failure is displayed.
Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
6.3.27.7 Creating an eSpace IPC Camera on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the Date Center Planning permission.
You have created cre ated a management domain in the Date Center Planning window.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the management domain to add a camera. Step 3 In the lower-left corner of the page, click Infrastructure to expand the infrastructure area. Step 4 Click the drop-down list box in Type and select Camera. Step 5 Select a camera and drag its icon to the management domain. To delete a device, click the device and choose Delete under
.
Step 6 Specify parameters shown in in Figure 6-132 6-132 in the right pane based on on Table 6-77. 6-77. Figure 6-132 Configuring parameters for an eSpace semi-dome IP camera
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Table 6-77 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
IP Address
IP address theSemi-Dome. device, device, see see. 6.3.27.3 Setti Setting ng Monitoring Parameters Para meters for the eSpace of IPC Semi-Dome
Camera Code Code
Set this parameter to a 15-digit identifier in the IVS system. For details, see Follow-up Procedure see Procedure in the the 6.3.27.5.1 Adding Clairvoyance-Compliant Cameras. Cameras. NOTE The camera code is the value of Device ID whose last three digits are replaced with 101. For example, if the value of Devi Device ce ID is 878719000000000, the value of Camera Code is 878719000000101.
Step 7 Click Connection test to start the connection c onnection test. Step 8 After the connection test is successful, click
in the toolbar toolbar to save the device
information. ----End
6.3.28 Adding the Video Management System
Because cameras and VCN do not support northbound and southbound isolation, the VCN service IP address must be set to a northbound IP address.
The camera IP address and the VCN500 service IP address must be in the same network segment.
For details about northbound IP address, see section Overview of Southbound and Northbound Network Isolation in iManager NetEco 6000 Product Documentation. Documentation .
6.3.28.1 Configuring VCN500 Server Parameters 6.3.28.1.1 Changing IP Addres Addresses ses of VCN500 Servers
Context
A default IP address is configured for a VCN500 serv ser ver before be fore delivery. delivery. Users need nee d to modify the IP address based on the actual network planning.
Because cameras camer as do not support northbound and southbound isolation, the VCN500 service IP address must be set to a northbound IP address.
For details about northbound IP address, see section Overview of Southbound and Northbound Network Isolation in iManager NetEco 6000 Product Documentation. Documentation .
Procedure Step 1 Modify the IP address for the VCN500. 1.
Configure the PC IP address and the VCN500 IP address in the same network segment. Enter the OMU Portal address (https://192.168.1.100:8443 by default) in the address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter button.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
You can log in to the OMU portal us using ing only Wi Windows ndows Interne Internett Explorer 8.0 or later.
2.
On the login page, enter the user name Admin and preset password Change_Me, and click Log In to enter the OMU Portal page. A message is displayed upon the first login indicating that you should modify the password. After modifying the password, keep it properly.
3.
Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration , and set the service IP address (VCN500 IP address) and NAT IP address according to the site requirements. Figure 6-133 Configuring the server
4.
Set Business IP to 10.68.231.158, Subnet mask to to 255.255.254.0, Gateway IP to 10.68.231.1. The values here are examples. The actual values prevail.
Set NAT IP to VCN500 external IP address.
Configure the NTP synchronization. synchronization. After setting The NTP clock source server to Yes, set the IP address of the NTP server. The server that connects to cameras needs to enable the camera NTP synchronization function.
Step 2 Enabling camera NTP synchronization. The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The camera NTP synchronization function function needs to be enabled for the server that connects to cameras. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, cameras will automatically time-synchronize from their access servers. 1.
Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN as the Admin user.
2.
Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.
3.
Select the server that the camera needs to access, set Module name to SCU and Parameter type to System property, and cli c lick ck Search .
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-134 Configuring Camera NTP Synchronization
4.
In the search searc h results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC and set Value to 1.
5.
Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the camera, after being connected to the server, will automatically time-synchronize time- synchronize with the server.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The VCN500 automatically restarts after the IP address is modified. The restart takes about 5 minutes. After the restart, restar t, use the new IP address to acce access ss the VCN500.
Change the PC IP address a ddress to an address in the network se segment gment of the new VCN500 IP address, enter e nter the VCN500 IP address in the address box of the Internet browser, br owser, and log in to the OMU Portal system.
(Optional) Deploying IVS in Stack Mode. For details, for details, refer to (Optional) Deploying IVS in Stack Mode in VCN500 Product Documentation . Log in to http://e.huawei.com/ to obtain the document.
(Optional) Deploying MPUs in Cluster Mode. for details, refer to (Optional) Deploying MPUs in Cluster Mode in VCN500 Product Documentation . Log in to http://e.huawei.com/ to obtain the document.
6.3.28.1.2 Changing the Preset Password for the VCN500 Servers
Context To ensure password safety, you need to change the OMU OM U Portal logi login n password per periodically iodically..
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OMU portal of the MPU server as the Admin user. Step 2 Click Change Password at the upper right corner, as shown in in Figure 6-135. 6-135. Figure 6-135 Changing a password
Step 3 Enter Old Password, New Password, and Confirm Password and click Save. Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-136 Changing a password 02
----End
6.3.28.2 Installing and Starting the IVS Client Prerequisites You have obtained the client installation package using either of the following f ollowing methods:
Obtain HW_IVS_Client.exe from the CD-ROM delivered with the VCN500.
Visit http://e.huawei.com/, search Client Package.zip and download the corresponding c orresponding software package.
Context Before configuring services, you must install the IVS client, and access VCN500 functions through the IVS client. The IVS client can c an be installed in a Windows 7 or a Windo Windows ws 8 operating opera ting system. Table 6-78 6-78 describes the requirements on the PC hardware. Table 6-78 Device requirements
Device
Requirements
CPU
The performance must be equal to or higher higher than that of second-generation Core i5, and the dominant frequency must be at least 3.2 GHz.
Memory
3 GB or higher
Hard disk
500 GB or higher
Video card
Video card memory: 1.0 GB or higher (with performance no less than that of the GeForce GT620 video card).
Network port
At least one 1000 Mbit/s network port
Display
21.5 inch or larger
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Decompress the Client Package.zip package to a directory, such as D:\. Step 2 Double-click HW_IVS_Client.exe . Use the default settings and proceed until the installation is complete.
The client language is automatically set to the operating system language.
The default installation directory of the client is C:\Program Files\huawei\HW_IVS_Client. The client must be installed in the sys system tem disk directory. Y You ou can select an installation path bas based ed on the site requirements.
Step 3 Double-click the shortcut icon displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-137. 6-137. Figure 6-137 Login page
on the desktop. The client logi login n screen is
The default User name and Password are Admin and Change_Me. When a user logs in to the eSpace IVS client for the first time, a password change dialog box is displayed, requiring the user to
change the password. Set Server IP address to the IP address of the VCN.
The default value of Port is 9900 . The default value is recommended.
Step 4 Click Log In to log in to the client home page.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
----End
6.3.28.3 Commissioning IPC6321 Cameras Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the camera has been obtained.
The camera has connected to the switch.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the camera is prepared (the default value of the IP address addre ss for IPC6321 is 192.168.0.120), and the PC has been connected to the camera over a switch.
Before connecting the camera to the NetEco, set monitoring parameters, such as the IP address, user name, and password, on the camera.
Because cameras camer as do not support northbound and southbound network isolation, the IP address must be set to a northbound IP address.
Context
For details about northbound IP address, see section Overview of Southbound and Northbound Network Isolation in iManager NetEco 6000 Product Documentation. Documentation .
The camera IP address and the VCN500 service IP address must be in the same network segment.
Procedure Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the camera, enter XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar, and a nd click Enter on the keyboard. XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the camera.
Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the initial initial password HuaWei123 , and click Login. After you log in to the camera successfully, change the password for security. For details, see 6.3.28.5 Changing the Preset Password for the IPC6321 Camera. Camera.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Basic Configuration > Network , and set network adapter parameterss as planned, as shown in parameter in Figure 6-138. 6-138.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-138 Basic network parameters
Enter the camera IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the camera.
Step 4 Click Save. ----End
6.3.28.4 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras Prerequisites If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and disconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connected camera, commission other cameras in the same way.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI. 1.
Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter button. The following lists the requirements of the operating system and browser for logging in to the camera through the WebUI.
Windows 7: Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11. Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35 – 5 51 1
Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35 – 51 51
Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35 – 51 51
2.
Google Chrome 45 or later versions need to install the Internet Explorer tab plug-in.
Only 32-bit web browsers are supported.
Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click Log In.
Step 2 For details about how to commission IP cameras and set parameters for them, see the document delivered or click here here to download the document. 1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
2.
Choose Settings > Network Configuration > Network Parameters, and set IP address, Subnet mask , and Gateway IP address for the camera according to the site plan.
3.
Set camera stream type, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters.
Set coding protocol to H.264. Figure 6-139 Setting primary stream parameters
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
Figure 6-140 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters
----End
Follow-up Procedure Commission the other cameras by referring to this section.
6.3.28.5 Changing the Preset Password for the IPC6321 Camera Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the camera has been obtained.
The camera has connected to the switch.
6 Adding Devices
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the camera is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the camera over a switch.
Because cameras camer as do not support northbound and southbound network isolation, the IP
Context address must be set to a northbound IP address. For details about northbound IP address, see section Overview of Southbound and Northbound Network Isolation in Ma in Manager nager NetEco NetEco 6 6000 000 V600R008C V600R008C00 00 Pr Product oduct D Documen ocumentation tation..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
The camera IP address and the VCN500 service IP address must be in the same network segment.
Procedure
Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the camera, enter a nd click Enter on the keyboard. XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar, and XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the camera.
Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the initial initial password HuaWei123 , and click Login. Step 3 Choose Configuration > Advanced Configuration > Security. The User page appears.
Step 4 Select the user whose password needs to be modified, and click Modify . Step 5 Enter a password and confirm the password. Step 6 Click OK . ----End
6.3.28.6 Changing the Preset Password for the IPC6325 Camera Prerequisites
The IP address planned for the camera has been obtained.
The camera has connected to the switch.
A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the camera is prepared, and the PC has been connected to the camera over a switch.
Procedure Step 1 Use a PC that has an IP address in the same network segment with that of the camera, enter XX.XX.XX.XX in the address bar, and a nd click Enter on the keyboard. XX.XX.XX.XX indicates the IP address of the camera.
Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the initial initial password HuaWei123 , and click Login. Step 3 Choose Configuration > Advanced Configuration > User Management.
The User Management page appears.
Step 4 Select the user that needs to change the password in the User List area, and a nd click Modify . The Modify dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Enter a password and confirm the password. Step 6 Click Save. After logging in to the camera home page, click Change password in the upper-right corner. The Modify User Info dialog box is displayed. Change the password on it.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
----End
6.3.28.7 Adding a Camera to the t he VCN500 Prerequisites
The VCN500 and camera are powered on and connected through a switch.
The IP addresses of the VCN500 and camera are in the same network segment.
Context Adding an IPC6321 camera is used as an example.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the IVS client as the Admin user. in Figure 6-141 6-141.. Step 2 Double-click Add Camera, as shown in Figure 6-141 Adding a camera
Step 3 Set search criteria. 1.
Set Drive to ONVIF. If there are multiple VCN500 servers, set Access server to the VCN500 server to which the camera needs to be connected.
2.
(Optional) click at the lower left corner, and enter Start IP Addresses and End IP 6-142.. Addresses for the camera, as shown in in Figure 6-142 Set Start IP Addresses and End IP Addresses to an appropriate IP address range. If the range is too large, the search process may take a long time.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-142 Setting the start and end IP addresses
3.
Then click Next .
Step 4 Search for and verify the camera. 1.
Click Search. The system displays the IP address of the camera that is found.
2.
Enter your camera user name and password in the Verify are area, a, and cli click ck Verify. If the 6-143.. verification succeeds, the camera icon color changes to green, as shown in in Figure 6-143
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-143 Verifying the camera user name and password
Cameras already added to the VCN500 will not be displayed on the search result page.
If the verification fails, check whether the default camera password has been changed, and enter the correct user name and password. If you click Verify for three times without a correct user name and password, you may be locked out.
c amera to be added, and cli c lick ck Next . Step 5 Select the camera The camera preview page appears.
Step 6 Preview the monitored area, and modify parameters such as Camera name, Location, and Brightness as necessary.
Step 7 Then click Next . The camera grouping page appears.
Step 8 Click Next . If the Status bar displ displays ays Step 9 Click Finish. ----End
, the camera is successfully added.
Follow-up Procedure After adding a camera to the VCN500, you view camera code on the VCN500 IVS client, and enter the code in the NetEco for follow-up operations. 1.
Log in to the IVS client as the Admin user, choose Users and Devices, and double-click Devices.
2.
Double-click the camera in the Name area, and choose Camera Settings in the page that appears. The number before # in the Code text box is the camera ca mera code, as shown in 6-144. Record the code for future use. Figure 6-144.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-144 Viewing the camera code
6.3.28.8 Configuring Camera Parameters on the NetEco This section describes how to configure video parameters on the Parameter Configuration page.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client.
You have the vi video deo management mana gement permission.
The 32-bit Internet Explorer 9/10/11 9/10/11 or 64-bit 64 -bit Internet Explorer 10/11 10/11 is available for video playback.
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Camera Management from the main menu. The Camera Management window is displayed. na vigation ation tree on the left, click Parameter Configuration . The Parameter Step 2 In the navig Configuration page is displayed. displayed.
Step 3 Specify parameters in the right pane based on on Table 6-79. 6-79.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
If not all Acti Ainformation ctiv veX controls aclicking recking enabled, correc t parameter informat ion andare cli Testthe . test connection fails after filling in the correct Registering stering with the OCX Plug-in Plug-in.. Enable ActiveX controls. For details, see see 6.3.28.10 Regi
Table 6-79 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Example
Server IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the video server and correct IPv4 address, containing numbers from 0 to 255. The IP address cannot be 0.0.0.0.
10.144.197.253
Server Port Number
Indicates the port number of
9900
the server.
NOTE The default port number for VCN500 is 9900.
Server Version
Indicates the version of the server.
VCN500
Login User
Indicates the user name for logging in to the IVS client.
Admin
NOTE Only browsing and query permissions permissi ons are re required quired on the NetEco. Configure video system users who have only browsing and query permissions.
The default user name for VCN500 is Admin. It is recommended that the new user name created using the IVS be used to access the camera. Before accessing the camera, ensure that the initial password of the user has been changed changed and tthe he user
has successfully logged in to the IVS.
It is recommended that the number of IVS clients to which the user can log in be set to to a val value ue great greater er than 5. Otherwise, when the user has logged in to the IVS client, the user cannot log in to it through the NetEco.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Parameter
Description
Example
Login Password
Indicates the password for logging in to the IVS client. Click Set Password and configure the password on the displayed page.
Change_Me
If the password does not comply with the rules, please change the password on device. NOTE The default password for VCN500 is Change_Me.
Transmission Protocol
Indicates the transmission protocol. Set the transmission protocol in the same way wa y as setting the protocol using eSpace IVS. The path for setting the transmission protocol is as follows: Para. Setting > Local Parameter > Transmission protocol . The transmission protocol can be UDP or TCP.
TCP
Step 4 Click Test after configuring parameters.
During the first test, the page turns blank. Wait 30s.
If the test fails, a message indicating a connection failure is displayed.
Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
6.3.28.9 Adding a Camera Using Automatic Automatic Discovery This topic describes how to quickly add an online camera that is not in any management
domain to a management domain using the automatic discovery function provided by the system.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
You have the operation rights for Camera Management .
You have set parameters par ameters on the Parameter Configuration page, and the connection between the NetEco and a nd VCN500 serv server er is successful. A camera has connected c onnected to the VCN500 server. server.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Management > Camera Management from the main menu. The Camera Management window is displayed.
Step 2 In the left navigation tree, choose Discovery Camera. a dd a camera by following the instructions pro provided vided iin n Step 3 On the Discovery camera page, add Figure 6-145 6-145.. Figure 6-145 Adding a camera using automatic discov d iscovery ery
The method of adding a camera using automatic discovery applies to all other management domains except Subnet and Root.
After a camera is added, it will be displayed under the corresponding management domain on the Data Center Planning page. On the Data Center Planning page, you can set parameters such as the Name for the camera.
----End
Follow-up Procedure 6-80 describes the operations that can be performed on the Discovery Camera page. Table 6-80 Table 6-80 Follow-up procedure
If You Want To...
Then...
Query the information about a camera
1. On the Discovery Camera page, specify one or multiple of the keywords Code, Name, and IP Address.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
If You Want To...
6 Adding Devices
Then... 2. Click Search. To reset the search criteria, click Reset.
Refresh the camera list
On the Discovery Camera page, click Refresh . The camera information in the list is refreshed.
6.3.28.10 Registering with the OCX Plug-in Only after you register with the OCX plug-in, you can play videos recorded by the camera on the NetEco in real time.
Procedure Step 1 Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options. Step 2 Click Security, as shown in in Figure 6-146 6-146..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-146 Security tab page
Step 3 Add the IP address of the client to the trusted site list. 1.
Select Trusted sites and click Sites. Add the IP address of the client to the trusted site list, as shown in in Figure 6-147 6-147..
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
Figure 6-147 Trusted site list
2.
Click Add and then click Close .
Step 4 Enable ActiveX-related options for trusted sites. After ActiveX-related options are enabled, a message is displayed, indicating that the computer is prone to risks due to security settings. Ignore the message.
1.
Choose Trusted sites > From definition rank . The Security setting – trusted trusted stand region dialog box is displayed, as shown in in Figure 6-148. 6-148.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
setting – trusted trusted stand region Figure 6-148 Security setting –
2.
Enable the following options and then click c lick Ok . −
3.
−
Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting
−
Download signed ActiveX controls
−
Download unsigned ActiveX controls
A dialog box is displayed, indicating Does the determination need to change the establishment of this region? . Click Yes.
Step 5 Register with the OCX plug-in.
Restart Internet Explorer and enter the IP address to be accessed by the client. The page for watching videos is displayed. Click Install according to the prompt message. After the OCX plug-in is installed, you can watch the videos. If videos are not displayed, contact Huawei technical support.
If it is the first time to install the plug, you need to wait about 10 to 20 seconds.
Step 6 If the OCX plug-in needs to be registered on the client again, perform the following operations to uninstall the OCX plug-in and then re-install it: 1.
Close Internet Explorer.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
2.
6 Adding Devices
Delete related files. If you are uninstalling NVR6128 version of the plug, find C disk directory folder exists IVS_OCX folder, right-click to select Delete. If you are uninstalling VCN500 version of the plug, plug, find C disk directory folder exists eSDK_IVS folder, right-click to select Delete.
3.
Restart Internet Explorer, enter the IP address for accessing the NetEco client, and open the page for video modules. The NetEco automatically installs the OCX plug- in.
----End
6.4 Scenarios for Connecting the ECC800 Collector 6.4.1 Commissioning Southbound Devices of ECC800 For details, see commissioning chapter in ECC800 Data Center Controller User Manual.
6.4.2 Setting and Adding the ECC800 Collector The requirements re quirements for ECC800 W WebUI ebUI login are as follows. Computer operating system: Windows 7 and later versions Browser: IE9 and later versions; Firefox and later versions; Chrome and later versions
6.4.2.1 Setting NetEco Parameters When the smart module can be connected to the NetEco, perform the following steps to configure parameters.
Procedure Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator. Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800 WebUI. Table 6-81 IP parameters
Path
Parameter
Default Value
Setting Value
System
IP
192.168.1.10
Set this parameter based on the IP address
assigned by the network administrator.
Settings > System Parameters > Monitor Module IP > WAN_1
Subnet mask
255.255.255. 0
Set this parameter based on the subnet mask assigned by the network administrator.
Default gateway
192.168.1.1
Set this parameter based on the default gateway address assigned by the network administrator.
Step 3 Set NetEco communications parameters on the ECC800 WebUI.
Issue 06 (2018-07-13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
iManager NetEco 6000 iManager Device Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Guide
6 Adding Devices
NetEco pa paramet rameters ers Table 6-82 NetEco
Path
Parameter
Default Value
Setting Value
System Settings > NMS Application > NetEco > Communicati on Parameters
Server IP
192.168.0.1 1
IP address of the primary NetEco server
Port number
31220
31220
Link to the monitoring IP address
WAN_1
WAN_1
NOTE The NetEco IP address and the ECC800 IP address must be configured in the same network to ensure normal connection between the the NetE NetEco co and tthe he ECC8 ECC800. 00.
Step 4 Set site configuration parameters on the ECC800 WebUI. Table 6-83 Site Configuration parameters
Path
Parameter
Default Value
Setting Value
System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration
Smart module name
FusionMod ule
Sets the user-defined smart module name.
System Type
FusionMod ule2000
Set the required system type.
----End
6.4.2.2 Creating an ECC800 Collector on the NetEco Prerequisites
You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser
You hav ha ve ccreated reated a modular modular or container in Data Center Planning. For detailed
View more...
Comments
